GE v6 User Manual

Guard Tour Tab – Manual Control Form

Mode Tab

Manual Control Form

The Manual Control Form allows the operator to perform the following, depending on the operator’s

facilities and permissions :

•

Manually lock/unlock doors.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated

demo.

•

Turn on/off DO (digital output).

Monitor on/off alarms and alarm groups.

Enable/disable DI inputs.

Arm/disarm Intrusion Zones.

Change the mode of a micro.

Start/stop a Guard Tour.

Refer to the individual tab controls for additional information regarding the available functions.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Micro Monitoring

Overview

Reference Topics:

Micro Monitoring Using the Micro Utility Form

Micro Utility Form Toolbar

Micro Utility Form Shortcut Menu

Micro Utility Form

The Micro Utility Form allows you to view all types of micros, the activities of those micros, monitor

communications, and control each micro in the system. Using the Micro Utility Form, you have the

capability to select, sort, and display only the micros that you want to view, and then save that view. The

first time the Micro Utility Form is opened for viewing, all micros will be displayed if their number is equal

to or less than 64.

Micro Monitoring Using the Micro Utility Form

Reference Topics:

Micro Utility Form Shortcut Menu

Micro Utility Form Toolbar

Micro Form

Time Schedule Form

Mode Schedule Form

Operations Menu

For a shortcut menu to functions available within the Micro Utility Form, select a micro from the list

and right-click.

The icon to the left of the description represents the type of micro. The table below explains the micro

types.

Icons

Symbolize

a direct-connect micro

a dial-up micro

a network micro

Column Headings:

Description: Description assigned to the micro when defined on the Micro Form.

Active Hostname: The name of the computer that controls communications to the micro. (For those

computers licensed for Client Redundancy, the current Active Hostnamemay be a backup client and

have a different name than the Default Hostnamecomputer.)

Default Hostname: (This column does not display if this computer is not licensed for Client

Redundancy.) The hostname displayed is the computer that normally hosts this micro. The icon image

displays in green when the micros are controlled by the originating host. The icon image displays in

yellow to signify a failed system. The backup client computer listed in the Active Hostnamecolumn is

controlling the dial-up and network+dialup micros for this computer.

Firmware version: The version of firmware operating the micro.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Address: Physical address assigned to the micro when defined.

State: Current state of the communications with the micro.

• Online means that the host will attempt to communicate with the micro.

• Offline means that the host will not attempt to communicate with the micro.

• Error means that there is a communications problem.

Connection messages include the following:

• Connected - micro is online and working.

• Shut down - No connection.

• Create port - trying to open a physical medium.

• Set up connection - physical medium is open.

• Tear down connection - connection is in the process of being closed.

• Waiting for call.

• Dialing.

• Retrying call.

• Destroy port – physical medium is being closed.

Status shows what is happening between the host and the micro. Messages include the following:

• Alarm download.

• Alarm message download.

• Badge download.

• DO download.

• DO group download.

• Download start.

• Elevator download.

• Error.

• Flash Error (See Diagnostic Log)

• Flashing Micro. (The entry includes the percent of flash download complete.)

• Flashing Completed.

• Idle.

• Incorrect micro type.

• Inquiry.

• Normal.

• Password download.

• Reader download.

• Reset.

• Schedule download.

• Telephone download.

• There are less then 4 passwords defined.

Mode: This is the current mode or state of the micro. The mode will be Normal, Mode 1, Mode 2, or

Mode 3, as previously defined on the Mode Schedule Form or by a manual control command.

Comm device messages include the following:

• If this is a direct-connect micro, lists the COM port to which this micro is connected.

• If this is a dial-up micro, the text Dial-Up will be displayed.

• If this is a network micro, the IP address of the micro will be displayed.

• If this is a network + direct micro, the IP address displays. If the micro loses network connection

and fails over to a direct connect, in approximately two minutes, the display changes from the IP

address to COM port. When a failover occurs, a yellow LED displays in the COM address column.

• If this is a network + network micro, the IP address displays. If the micro loses network

connection, fails over to a secondary network IP address, the display changes to the secondary IP

address. When a failover occurs, a yellow LED displays in the COM address column.

If a host computer is licensed for Client Redundancy, has assigned a backup client, and a

failover occurs, a failover COM port displays.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Head Of Line

•

If the micro is defined as head-of-line, this field will be blank.

If the selected micro is not head-of-line, this field contains a description of the micro that is the head

of this line.

Message Count

This field will display the number of messages waiting to be sent to a selected micro.

Selecting Facilities

Select Facilities

Reference Topic:

Operator Form

Set Active Facilities Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select the active facilities (those you want to assign to the current operator)

from a list of facilities available for assignment, as set using the Operator Form.

•

Select, then click the right arrow to assign an available facility.

Select, then click the left arrow to unassign a facility.

Available

This column lists all facilities that have been assigned to the current operator.

Active

This column lists the facilities that are currently active. Only those access rights that are assigned to the

facilities listed in this column will be available.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Devices

Configuring Devices

In case of a default host computer that has failed, devices that have been added to this default host

computer during the failover cannot come online until the default host has recovered and a system

recovery notification is received.

The following order is recommended for completion of Secure Perfect device configuration:

1. Create micro records (Additional device records can be configured following the creation of micro

records.)

2. Configure reader records

3. Configure digital inputs

4. Set up alarm instructions

5. Configure alarm records

6. Configure alarm groups

7. Configure digital outputs

8. Configure digital output groups

9. Configure elevators

10. Configure DVRs

11. Configure cameras

12. Start micro communications

Alarms

Overview

Reference Topic:

Alarm Form Completion

Alarms

An alarm is a notification that something has happened within SP. An alarm occurs when a defined

device, such as a digital input changes to a state defined as the alarm state. For example, if a digital input

alarm state is defined as Open in the Active State, then an alarm occurs when the state changes to

Open. Alarms can also be used for nonmicro related events such as CCTV alarms. Most alarms are tied

to digital output points associated with devices such as switches and motion detectors.

Not all alarms will be present at the same time, and are determined by the boards installed in the

micro.

When you set up your micro, some alarms are automatically set up for you. The Alarm Form is used to

modify an alarm record. However, alarms for digital inputs must be set up manually using the Digital Input

Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Form Completion

Reference Topics:

Editing or Modifying Alarm Records on the Alarm Form

Use the Alarm Form to modify an alarm record. With the exception of external alarms, you cannot delete

alarm records; alarms are managed by the owner of the alarm record. The alarm owner can be an API,

board, CCTV Interface, digital input, Kalatel camera, Kalatel DVMR, micro, or reader. For an alarm to

display on the Alarm Monitor Form, you can either select the Monitor field on the Alarm Form or schedule

the alarm to be monitored. The alarm will now display if it is set to be monitored and changes to an alarm

condition.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Time Schedules Form or Events

Form, all schedule or event records will display.

To search for, view, or edit existing records, click Search. A list of records will display.

Description

When the records are created, the default description is in the format: mmmm-b-ppwhere mmmm

represents the micro number to which this alarm is associated, brepresents the board number, and pp

represents the point or device number.

•

Example: 0001-1-01 Tamper

This tamper alarm is on micro 1, board 1, alarm 1. To change this description, select and enter text over

the existing text and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmmm-b-ppprefix in each

alarm displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware.

•

Example Failover Alarm: BCTTOKYO Failover Alarm

A failover alarm is created when backup clients are assigned to the default client computer. The alarm

record displays the default client computer name as part of the description. This failover alarm indicates

the default client as BCTTOKYO. If the description indicates Region Failover Alarm, the name of

the Regional Database Server is included in the description.

•

Alarm descriptions coming into Secure Perfect from an API can be ambiguous, and the source of the

alarm point may be unclear. It is recommended that you rename API alarm points to correspond to the

actual physical point, to assist in processing and acknowledging when an alarm displays on the Alarm

Monitor.Facility

A facility can be assigned for the alarm from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by

this operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Groups

Reference Topics:

Group Tab

Events Tab

Keypad Alarm Shunting

Alarm Group Form

Alarm groups provide two things: 1) a convenient way of scheduling many alarms at once, and 2) a

means of disabling monitoring in many alarms from a keypad reader. Refer to the reference topic,

Keypad Alarm Shunting, for additional information. When a micro record is created, 16 alarm groups

are also created. You cannot delete an alarm group record. Alarm groups are owned by the associated

micro record. Use the Alarm Group Form to assign events or schedules to alarm groups. See Keypad

Alarm Shunting for more information.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules Form or Events Form, all

schedule or event records will display.

Click Search to locate and view or edit existing alarm group records.

Description

The description of the alarm group should be unique. When the records are created, the default

description includes the micro to which this alarm group is associated and the number of the alarm group,

for example 0001 Group 1, which represents alarm group one on micro one. All alarms are

automatically assigned alarm group 0. To change this description, type over the existing text and save

the record. It is recommended that you keep the alarm group number and micro number prefix to aid in

locating the alarm points on the physical hardware.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for the alarm group from the drop-down list of available facilities for

assignment by this operator.

Be very careful when assigning the facility of an alarm group to a different facility than the micro.

You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Cameras

Camera Form

Reference Topics:

Presets Tab

Use the Camera Form to edit existing camera parameters. Camera records are automatically created

when a DVR is defined on the Digital Video Recorder Form. The camera records display in the format

00X-0X Camerawhere 00Xis the DVR address and 0Xis the camera number.

Description

Enter a camera name or click Search to display a list box of existing cameras.

Device description upates are communicated to corresponding alarms, DIs, and DOs. In order for

changes to migrate to additional form windows that may be open at the time of a change, the open

windows should be closed and then re-opened before the device description is able to be seen.

Facility

A facility option can be designated for your camera.

Digital Inputs

Digital Input Form Completion

Reference Topics:

Digital Video Recorder Form Completion

Digital inputs are physical sensing devices, such as door sensors or motion sensors, used to monitor an

electronic contact connected to a micro. When a micro record is created, digital input records are also

created. Use the Digital Input Form to modify a digital input record. You cannot delete digital input

records. The digital inputs are managed by the associated micro record. The number of digital inputs is

based on the micro you set up and boards that the micro contains.

The alarms for digital inputs are not created automatically when you set up a micro. Set the Type field to

Alarmand then save the record. The associated alarm record is created. Refer to the Micro Installation

Guide for information on how to connect a digital input device to the micro.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right

mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Time Schedules Form or Events Form, all

schedule or event records will display.

To view and edit existing records, click Search. A list of records displays.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Description

When the records are created, the default description is in the format: mmmm-b-ppwhere mmmm

represents the micro number to which this digital input is associated, brepresents the board number, and

pprepresents the point or device number.

Example: 0001-1-01 DI

This digital input is on micro 1, board 1, point 1. To change or add to this description, enter text over the

existing text and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmmm-b-ppprefix in each digital

input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware. This field accepts a

maximum of 64 characters.

Facility

A facility can be assigned for the new Digital Input record from the Facility drop-down list.

The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the micro when a micro is created.

Be very careful when assigning the facility of a DI to a different facility than the micro. You can

create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment.

Digital Outputs

Digital Output Form

Reference Topics:

Digital Output Tab

Schedule Tab

Manual Control Tab

Device Menu

A digital output represents an external device, such as lights, sirens and door strikes that may be

connected to the micro. Refer to your micro installation manual for information on how to connect a digital

output device to the micro. The digital outputs available depend on the micro setup and readers used.

Use the Digital Output Form to search and view or modify an existing digital output record.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules Form, all schedule

records will display.

Description

When the records are created, the default description is in the format: mmmm-b-ppwhere mmmm

represents the micro number to which this digital output is associated, brepresents the board number,

and pprepresents the point or device number.

Example: 0001-1-01 DO

This digital output is on micro 1, board 1, point 1. To change this description, type over the existing text

and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmm-b-ppprefix in each digital output

description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware. This field accepts a

maximum of 32 characters.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for your new Digital Output record from the Facility drop-down list.

Be very careful when assigning the facility of a digital output to a different facility than the micro.

You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Digital Output Groups

Digital Output Group Form

Reference Topics:

Group Tab

Schedule Tab

Digital output groups provide an easy, convenient way of scheduling many digital outputs at once. To

create digital output groups, manually create the groups and then assign the digital outputs to them. Use

the Digital Output Group Form to assign digital outputs to a group and schedules to digital output groups.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules Form, all schedule records will

display.

To locate and view existing records, click Search button. A list of records will display. You can either click

the Add button to add a new record OR search and view or change an existing record.

Description

Assign a unique description to the digital output group.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by this

operator.

If you assign DOs that belong to a different facility, you may be creating an undesired result; not all

DOs will be visible under certain facilities.

Digital Video Recorders

Overview

Reference Topic:

Digital Video Surveillance

Digital video surveillance is integrated into the Secure Perfect system and requires its own hardware and

software. The system supports the following Kalatel digital video multiplexer/recorders:

Kalatel DVMR^e-4 CD

Kalatel DVMR^e-10 CD

Kalatel DVMR^e-16 CD

(Requires duplex PPC firmware Version 3.18 or later and MUX firmware Version 3.24 or later.)

Kalatel DVMR^e-4 CT

Kalatel DVMR^e-10 CT

Kalatel DVMR^e-16 CT

(Requires triplex firmware Version 5.xx or later. Kalatel DVMR^eMatrix is supported as a 16 CT recorder.)

Increasing the processor speed and memory on the Secure Perfect Server and/or client workstations

may be required for optimizing performance in your specific application.

The Digital Video Recorder Form allows you to configure integrated digital video surveillance within SP.

This option provides event-driven video recording, allowing you to access and control live and recorded

video and initiate camera control at any workstation within a Secure Perfect system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

SP Enterprise Edition supports up to 64 licensed DVR connections.

SP Professional Edition supports up to 16 licensed DVR connections.

EZ Edition supports up to 8 licensed DVR connections.

The following order is recommended for configuration of an SP Editions DVR system:

1. Set up operators and permissions.

2. Configure the DVR.

3. Configure DVR devices. DVR devices can be hosted on the SP Server computer and/or client

workstations. The actual number of DVR devices hosted on each Server computer may vary.

Distributing DVR hosting across multiple computers may be required for optimizing system

performance in your specific application.

4. Create preset records.

5. Configure cameras.

6. Set up event triggers.

7. OPTIONAL: Set up alarm graphics.

Digital Video Recorder Form Completion

Reference Topics:

Overview

Communications Settings Tab

Video Display Tab

Status Tab

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button.

Click Search to display or change an existing record or click Add to add a new record and display default

values.

Description

Enter a unique descriptive name for your DVR in the Description field.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for your new DVR from the Facility drop-down list. When you change a

facility designation, it changes the facility for the DVR only. You receive a message displaying, Do other

devices change to the same facility as the digital video recorder? Select Yes or No. If you select

Yes, the alarm record and camera records will change as well. You will need to verify the accuracy of the

revised records.

The Digital Video Recorder Form contains the tabs listed below. Complete each tab in the order they are

listed.

Refer to the Digital Video Viewer Help file for additional information about features of PTZ control and

event tagging.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Elevator Management

Overview

Reference Topics:

Elevator Form

Elevators

The first step in configuring elevator control is setting up floors. The Floor Form of the Administration

menu allows you to set up floors.

Now, you can configure the elevator records. You will use the Elevator Form to configure elevator

records. Here, you select the method of elevator control, the readers, and the floors that will be used. You

can set a reader for elevator control using this form only. When you return to the Reader Form and

display a corresponding reader record, you will notice that all other options in the Logical Type section

are not available.

Elevator control does not span micros. This means the reader, digital outputs, and digital inputs (if

applicable) must be on the same micro.

The type of boards you want to use in your dedicated micro (DO only or a combination of DO and DI

boards) determines the number of floors available. After installing the CPU board, the

Power/Communication board, and at least one reader board, there are four slots available that can be

used for digital input boards or a combination of digital input boards and digital output boards.

Methods of Elevator Control

There are three methods of implementing elevator control:

No Floor Tracking Method

With this method, you define the floors available and define a digital output for each floor. Only digital

outputs provided by the 16 DO board can be used. In addition, each DO can by used in only one

elevator and mapped to only one floor. The number of floors is limited by the number of 16 DO boards

that can be placed in the micro; the maximum is four. Therefore, the maximum number of floors

available is 64 (4 boards x 16 DOs = 64 DOs).

Floor Tracking by Input

Define the floors available, then define a digital input and digital output for each floor. The digital

inputs are used for floor selection. Only digital inputs provided by the 20 DI board can be used for floor

selection and each digital input can by used for only one elevator and mapped to only one floor. The

digital outputs are used to control where the elevator moves. Only digital outputs provided by the 16

DO board can be used, and each digital output can only be used in one elevator and mapped to one

floor. Using this method, a maximum of 32 floors can be supported (2 boards x 16 DOs = 32 DOs).

Floor Tracking by Keypad

Define the floors available and define a digital output for each floor. The reader’s keypad is used to

select the desired floor. Only digital outputs provided by the 16 DO board can be used. In addition,

each DO can be used in only one floor. The number of floors is limited by the number of 16 DO boards

that can be placed in the micro; the maximum if four. Therefore, the maximum number of floors

available is 64 (4 boards x 16 DOs = 64 DOs).

Floor Tab of Access Right Form

On the Personnel menu, select Access Right to open the Access Right Form, Floor tab to assign access

rights to elevators and floors. Select from the Available list those elevators you want to use with the form.

The elevators that display in this list are those that are set up on the Elevator Form. Floors and DOs can

be assigned an access right to define which floors a person can access and what DOs a person can

trigger with a valid badge.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Elevator Form

Reference Topics:

Overview

Setting Up an Elevator

Elevator Tab

Floor/Digital Output Tab

Floor/Digital Output/Digital Input Tab

Use this form to create or modify an elevator record.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Elevator control does not span micros. This means the reader, digital outputs, and digital inputs (if

applicable) must be on the same micro.

Description

To locate and view existing records, click Search. A list of records will display. You can search and view

or edit an existing record.

Micros

Overview

Reference Topics:

Micro Form Completion

Records Generation

Micros

Micro records can be created within Secure Perfect without having the micros attached and

configured. Additional device records can be configured after creating micro records.

Micros control access through the use of devices such as badge readers, alarm points, and output points

physically wired to the micro, which is then connected to the host by one of the following methods:

1. Directly

2. Using RS-232 cabling through a modem

3. Through a network

Secure Perfect provides a micro auto-configuration feature, allowing you to set up the database with the

exact board configuration that you selected during the micro configuration process. When you create a

micro record, only those records for the associated devices (readers, alarms, alarm groups, and digital

outputs) supported by the micro’s configuration are created. The auto-configuration feature anticipates

your configuration requirements. For example, the Micro/PX2000 is a single-board microcontroller. Other

boards do not display for selection, as shown in the image below. This board address is 2.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

In this example, notice the DI records created automatically when the Micro/PX2000 record was saved.

The Micro Form contains a combination of tabs. The settings selected on the Micro Definition tab

determine which tabs display.

Note that any time a badge that is not in a micro is presented to a reader, it is reported as unknown and

the host sends the badge to the micro. This happens regardless of the Badge Loading option. The micros

can store only a limited number of badges. When a previously unknown badge is sent to a micro whose

badge capacity is exceeded, the micro randomly chooses a badge to delete to make room for the new

badge. The badge is deleted from the micro but not from the Secure Perfect system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Micro Form Completion

Reference Topics:

Events Tab – Micro Form

Status Tab – Micro Form

Micro Configuration Tab

Port Settings Tab

Settings to Reach Host Tab

Settings to Reach Micro Tab

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules Form or Events Form, all

schedule or event records will display.

ADDING OR MODIFYING A RECORD:

Click Add to add a new record or Search to display or change an existing record.

Description

The description of the micro should be unique and include where the micro is located and/or how it is

used.

Example: 1 - Building A2 North Telco Closet could represent Micro 1 located in Building A2

North in the Telco Closet.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for your new micro record from the Facility drop-down list. All devices,

such as readers, alarms, and DIs added with the micro will belong to the same facility as the micro. If you

edit the Facility option on an existing micro record, a messages displays, Do other devices change to

the same facility as the micro? If you select Yes, all associated devices and alarms will change to

newly assigned facility. If you select No, the facility change takes place only on the micro record.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Readers

Readers Overview

Reference Topics:

Reader Tab

Door Functions Tab

Routing Tab

Functions Schedule Tab

Routing Schedule Tab

Reader Type Events Tab

Status Tab

Readers Form

Readers are the devices that interpret the encoded numbers on badges. Readers are usually located

near doors or gates that the system controls. Badges are presented to the readers in order to gain

access through a door.

When a micro record is created, reader records are also created. The number of records depends on the

micro you configure and the reader boards that the micro contains. The reader is automatically enabled

as Online and Active, and configured to accept badge transactions when a reader record is created. The

number of active readers counts against your reader limit. For example, if your license key allows the use

of 128 readers, you may have only 128 readers marked as active.

When the total of all reader records equals the maximum number of active readers allowed by your

license, you will receive a warning message.

The reader record controls both the physical reader and how the door locks and unlocks. See your micro

and reader installation manual for information on how to connect readers to a micro. Use the Reader

Form to modify the reader configuration.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules Form or Events Form, all

schedule or event records will display.

ADDING OR MODIFYING A RECORD:

Click Search to display a list of previously created reader records. You can either click Add on the

Secure Perfect toolbar to add a new record OR modify an existing record.

Description

When reader records are created, the default description is in the format: mmmm-b-ppwhere mmmm

represents the micro number to which this reader is associated, brepresents the board number, and pp

represents the reader number.

Example: 0001-1-01 Reader

This reader is on micro 1, board 1, reader 1. To change or add to this description, select and enter text

over the existing text and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmmm-b-ppprefix in

each reader displayed to aid in locating the reader points on the physical hardware. This field accepts a

maximum of 64 characters.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for your new Reader record from the drop-down list of available facilities

for assignment by this operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Person Records Creation

Access Rights

Reference Topics:

Access Rights Tab

Floor Tab

Digital Output Groups Tab

Intrusion Zone Tab

Badge Design Creation Overview

Access Right Form

Use this form to create access rights to define where (with readers) and when (with time schedules) an

individual can gain entry. Floors and digital output groups can be assigned to an access right to define

which floors a person can access and what digital output groups a person can trigger with a valid badge.

Intrusion Zones can be assigned to an access right, allowing the ability to arm/disarm (with a reader) the

zone and access to a particular zone.

ADDING OR MODIFYING A RECORD:

Description

Click Add to add and assign a unique title to this record or Search to display or change an existing

record.

Facility

You can assign a facility from the drop-down list of those facilities available for assignment by this

operator.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any tab and right-click.

Departments

Reference Topic:

Department Tab

The Department Form allows you to create a department that you can then assign to a person record

using the Person Form. Department selection can also be used to group records when running a Person

Report.

ADDING OR MODIFYING A RECORD:

Click Search to display a list of previously created Departments. You can either click Add on the Secure

Perfect toolbar to add a new Department record OR modify an existing record.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for the Department from the drop-down list of available facilities for

assignment by this operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Person Records Creation

Reference Topics:

Person Form

Use this form to create a record for a person, someone who can access the readers controlled by the

Secure Perfect system. Click Add to add a new record or click Search to display a list of previously

created person records to review or modify.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Last Name

Enter the last name of the individual record you are creating. This is a required field.

A facility option can be assigned to this record from the drop-down list of available facilities for

assignment by this operator.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, right-click below any of the tabs on this form.

Personnel Type Assignment

Reference Topic:

Personnel Type Tab

Personnel Type Form

This form is used to create category types for employees and assign default badge designs for each

category.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Badging

Badge Alias Form

Reference Topic:

Badge Alias Tab

This form is available only if aliasing option was elected during initial Secure Perfect Server

installation.

Use this form to control the alias numbers that will display in place of the encoded badge number. An

alias is a number that represents the encoded badge number. You decided whether to use badge alias

and which method during installation of SP. If you chose None, this form is unavailable in the Secure

Perfect program.

Badge alias provides added security in that the encoded number is displayed only to authorized users.

The encoded badge number is hidden on the Badge Form, reports, and Activity Monitor Form. There are

two methods of using badge alias:

Manual: Enter the badge alias number on this form.

Automatic: The badge alias number is chosen for you.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Badge Design

Reference Topics:

Design Tab

Image Capture Overview

Complete the Badge Design Form to create badge designs. Badge designs are the graphics printed on

badges. You may want to use different graphics for different types of personnel, such as a specific

graphic for regular employees and a different graphic for contract employees within your organization.

Element

Add

Description

Displays existing records.

Configure a new Badge Design record. Default values display for you.

Delete

Delete a selected Badge Design record from the list in the windowpane on the right,

that is no longer required or applicable.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Description

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this badge design. The field accepts 1 to

32 characters.

During installation of Badge Designer, four standard badge designs are included, in

the Designs folder of Secure Perfect:

•

Landscape

Portrait

No Design

Wanted Poster

•

Do one of the following:

•

Select from the list of existing standard design records.

Select and edit a standard design by renaming and saving.

Create a new design.

When you add a design, enter a desciption and click Save to enable the Edit

Badge Design button on this form.

Facility

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by

this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be assigned for you.

Badge Design Creation Overview

The Badge Design application has an extensive Help system to assist in designing your badge layout,

import graphics, link designs to badgeholder information, and add barcodes or encode magnetic stripes.

This topic is an abridged summary of the badge design process.

To create your own simple badge design:

1. Select Badge Design from the Secure Perfect Personnel menu.

2. The Badge Design Form, Design tab displays.

3. Click Add and enter a unique Description, then click Save. The Edit Badge Design button is now

enabled.

Click Edit Badge Design to run the Badge Design application.

1. Select New from Imaging File menu.

2. Draw a shape in your design window the size of your badge.

3. For a background color, select Edit, Background, then select a color from Color dialog that

displays.

4. Add one or several bitmaps inside the badge design parameters.

5. Add one or several text boxes.

6. Move or resize the photo and text as desired.

7. Click Save.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Badging Overview

Reference Topic:

Badge Form

A badge identifies a person to SP. This is usually a card with an embedded number that uniquely

identifies the card. However, the badge does not have to be a card; it could be a unique number that is

entered into a keypad reader. The Badge Form is used to define a badge by entering specific

information, such as the badge number and the person to whom this badge is assigned. Click Add to add

a new record or click Search to display a list of previously created badge records to review or modify.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Description:

Enter a unique description of the badge, person name, or badge type. This is a required field and this

record will not save without an entry in this dialog box. If you attempt to save a record without a

description, a dialog box displays, asking if you want to use the badge identification number as the

Description. Click Yes to use the badge identification number or return to the form and enter a

Description of your choice. (If you are entering badge records before person assignment, consider

entering a badge identification number as the Description.) This dialog box accepts up to 32

alphanumeric characters.

If this is a converted database from an earlier version of Secure Perfect that allowed blank

Description fields, the badge identification number now displays in the Description field of those records.

Facility:

The facility assignment is a read-only field. Facilities are assigned by the operator when creating a

Person record.

Image Capture Overview

Your photographs and signatures can be created by digital cameras, video cameras, and signature

pads. Support for certain Imaging features and functions may be product specific and not necessarily

supported by all compatible peripherals.

Selecting an Input Device

Follow the instructions provided by the device manufacturer for installing an input device. Imaging can

use any device that has a TWAIN, WINTAB, or Video for Windows (VFW) driver installed.

To select an input device:

1. Go to the Personnel menu and select Person. The Person Form displays.

2. Select the Photo tab, then click Search to display a current list of records.

3. Select one of the records in the records list, then click Capture Image/Signature. The Secure

Perfect Image Capture Application screen displays.

4. Using the mouse, point to the photo area and right-click. A context menu displays.

5. Select Input Device from the context menu. A Select Profile window displays, listing the available

input devices on your computer. By default, the input device loads from a file.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

6. Select the input device you will be using and click OK. The next time you capture a photo, the

program will use the input device you selected.

7. Repeat these steps to set up an input device for signature pads. The program will recognize a

separate input device for photos and signatures.

To select a record and capture a NEW image for the selected record:

1. Select Person from the Personnel menu.

2. Select the Photo tab on the Person Form.

3. Select ONE of the records in the Record List.

4. Click Capture Image/Signature to capture a new image. Based on the input device you previously

selected, the proper interface window will come up for adjusting, capturing, and loading a new

image.

5. Adjust, then save the adjusted settings.

6. Click Capture Photo to capture the new image. Once the photo is taken, the Image Enhancement

dialog box will display.

7. The dialog box that displays allows you to crop and enhance the newly captured image. You will

notice that a highlighting box with eight sizing handles is placed directly over the center of the

Original Image.

8. Place your mouse pointer over the image. The pointer will change from a single arrow to a four-

headed arrow. This allows you to move the cropping area across the newly acquired image.

9. At this point, you can either capture a different portion of the image "as is," or adjust the highlighting

box to capture some or all of the image.

Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application.

To crop an image:

1. Place your mouse pointer within the highlighting box’s cropping area.

2. Press and hold down your left mouse button, and drag (move) the cropping area to the desired

location on the image. Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new location

of the highlighting box.

3. Click OK. The photo can be placed on either the front or the back of your badge design. To print

the photo, your badge design must include photo image keylines. When you print the badge from

the Secure Perfect application, the keylines are replaced by the image.

To resize the crop box:

1. Place your mouse pointer directly over one of the highlighting box handles. The pointer changes

from a four-headed arrow to a two-headed arrow. This allows you to resize the cropping area.

2. Press and hold down your left mouse button, and drag (move) the handle toward the center of the

cropping area. The size of this highlighting box is fixed to the aspect ratio of the image type: 4 x 5

for photos; 5 x 1 for signatures.

3. When the cropping area is sized to your satisfaction, move the highlighting box so that it covers the

portion of the image that you want to capture.

4. Click OK. The Secure Perfect Image Capture Application screen displays with the selected image

in place. To print the photo, your badge design must include photo image keylines. When you print

the badge from the Secure Perfect application, the keylines are replaced by the image. The photo

can be placed on either the front or the back of your badge design.

5. Click OK. The selected image will be moved to the Photo tab of the Person Form.

6. Click Save. The image capture is saved to the database.

Displaying Existing Images

During normal operations, images are not downloaded from the server. In order to view an existing image

for a badge record, the image(s) must be loaded to the computer. On the Person Form, select the Photo

tab, then click Search, and highlight a record from the record list. Click Capture Image/Signature button

to enable the Secure Perfect Image Capture Application screen. Move the mouse pointer to the existing

image and right-click. A shortcut menu for the image will appear. The available image options on that

menu are discussed in the paragraphs that follow.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Capture

Based on the input device you previously selected, the appropriate interface window will come up for

adjusting, capturing and loading a new image.

Enhance and Crop

These options allow you to individually crop or enhance the current image. You can adjust the existing

image without having to recapture the image.

Compare (and Restore)

When a stored image is downloaded and a new image is captured, the Compare option will be enabled

on the shortcut menu to compare the newly captured or edited image to the original image. Choosing

Restore will undo any changes made to the original image.

Clear

When you select the Clear option from the shortcut menu, the image will be cleared and the image file

will be deleted. (The image cannot be recovered.)

Enhancement Shortcut Menu:

There are four submenus for the Enhancement shortcut menu option.

Adjust by Example

When you select this option, a dialog box will display. You can adjust the brightness, contrast, focus,

exposure, and red, green, and blue colors.

Special Effect by Example

This dialog box allows you to add special effects to any image. The applicable effects are Mosaic,

Impressionist, Watercolor, Emboss, and Posterize.

Remove Red Eye

This dialog box allows you to remove the red eye effect of any person in an image.

Vignette

The Vignette dialog box allows you to configure a vignette effect to any image.

Manipulation Shortcut Menu:

Mirroring

Flip Vertically: Flip an image from top to bottom.

Flip Horizontally: Flip an image from left to right.

Invert (negative)

Select this option to invert an image (create a color negative).

Convert to 8-bit grayscale

Select this option to convert an image to an 8-bit 256-grayscale image. Once this election is selected,

there is no undo. You will have to reload your image.

Save Image

Changes to an existing image or newly captured image are saved to the host when you click Save.

Export To File

When you select this option, a Save As window will display. Navigate to the Secure Perfect Images folder

that contains previously captured photo images. You may select a filename, image format, bit depth, and

JPEG compression factor. When you click Save, the contents of the image control are saved using the

selected settings. If you want, you can replace an existing image.

Select Input Device

This option allows you to select an input device on the Select Profile dialog box, from a list of Capture

Profiles. You may also set and apply automatic properties for the image you are about to capture.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Select Image Type

This dialog box enables you to configure image types in the EPISUITE SDK configuration database. You

can use this dialog box to edit, create, or remove image types. To modify an image type, highlight the

image type name in the list and click Edit to open the Image Type Manager dialog box. Click Add to

create a new image type, or click Remove to delete the highlighted image type.

Revert Changes

When you make any change to the image, the Revert Changes option will be enabled. Otherwise, the

option is dimmed and you will not be able to select it. Selecting this option will reload the original image.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Administration Menu Options

Alarm Instruction Form

Reference Topics:

Alarm Instruction Tab

Alarm Monitor Form

Alarm instructions are directions on how to react to alarms. Use this form to create messages that will

display on the Alarm Monitor Form whenever the associated alarm occurs.

ADDING OR MODIFYING A NEW RECORD:

Click Add to add a new record OR Search and view or change an existing record.

Facility: A facility can be assigned to your new Alarm Instruction record from the Facility drop-down list.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Alarm Notifier Form

Reference Topics:

Alarm Selection Tab

Person Selection Tab

Message Format Tab

Keep in mind that you can use an SMTP Server such as Lotus Notes or SendMail, or even online mail

services such as Yahoo, to send e-mail. Contact your local network administrator to get the SMTP server

name to be used. E-mail sent by Secure Perfect will be sent through this SMTP Server. If you receive an

error message or have a problem with your configuration, contact your local network administrator.

The Alarm Notifier form allows you to:

•

Assign those alarms and reset conditions that will trigger an e-mail message.

Assign people who will receive that e-mail notification of the alarm/reset condition.

Format the style and content of the e-mail message.

Click Add to add a new record or Search to display or change an existing record.

Description

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this alarm notification.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by this

operator.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right

mouse button.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Response Form

Related Topic:

Alarm Response Tab

A response describes a reaction to an alarm. The Alarm Response Form allows you to create a list of

frequently used, predefined responses to an alarm, and reduces the need to type an entry. The response

entries that you create will display as selections on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Click Search to view or edit existing response records or click Add to begin a new response record.

A facility can be assigned for the alarm from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by

this operator.

Alarm Routing and Bumping Form

Reference Topics:

Definition Tab - Alarm Routing and Bumping

Alarms Tab - Alarm Routing and Bumping Form

This form allows you to configure the routing of alarms to one or more Client Groups by time schedule or

at all times. Bumping is a term used to describe forwarding the alarms to an additional location.

• You must have Client Groups configured beforehand.

• You can bump an alarm to one or more Client Groups following a time lapse of an unacknowledged

and unpurged alarm to the Client Groups selected for routing.

• Alarm bumping information is displayed on the Alarm Monitor form in the alarm state column.

You may want to review this Sample Scenario before you begin. This is a routing and bumping schedule

for a business in two buildings (administration building and a factory, working three shifts).

Time

Schedules

Alarms

Route to:

Alarms

Bump to:

Alarms

Bump

After

Group Descriptions:

Client Work Station (WS) #s

8am to 5pm

Group 1

Group 2

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

10 min

5 min

1 min

Group 1

Group 2

WS#1: Front Door - Admin Bldg

WS#3: Front Door - Factory

5pm to Midnight

Midnight to 8am

WS#4: Back Door - Admin Bldg

WS#5: Back Door - Factory

Group 3

Group 4

N/A

WS#2 (Supervisor’s desk -

Admin Bldg, 8am to 5pm)

Group 5

Group 6

WS#6 (Supervisor’s desk -

Factory, 5pm to Midnight)

WS#5 (Supervisor’s desk -

Factory, Midnight to 8am)

Example: An alarm comes in at 8:30am that is configured to be routed to Group 1. The alarm is not

purged or acknowledged; therefore, it is bumped to Group 4 at 8:40am. The transaction is written to

Alarm History.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Complete this form as follows:

Element

Add

Description

Display or change an existing record.

Configure a new alarm routing and/or bumping record. Default values display for

you.

Delete

Delete a selected record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no

longer required or applicable.

Description

Facility

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this record. The field accepts 1 to 64

characters.

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for

assignment by this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be

assigned for you.

API Connections Form

Reference Topics:

This option is purchased individually and licensed with your Secure Perfect system. For complete

details, contact your GE Security Sales Representative.

The number of API records that you can configure is limited to the number of API connections for which

you are licensed. This form allows you to define an interface license for external application integration,

by assigning a description of the API (Application Program Interface) service that has been configured to

communicate with Secure Perfect.

Once configured, real-time event processing and remote command and control functionality extended by

way of the API includes the following:

•

Bi-directional alarm event processing for monitoring and acknowledgement

Receiving Secure Perfect access control badge events

Receiving digital input events

Receiving intrusion zone events

Control of alarm point monitoring On/Off

Control of digital input points Enable/Disable

Control of digital output points Open/Close

Control of intrusion zones Arm/Disarm.

An API can be installed on any computer in your Secure Perfect system; however, do not attempt to

install on a domain controller. The installation will not complete properly. Review the system configuration

with your IT Department for alternative reconfiguration options.

Description: Enter the title of the external API. This should be a unique identifier to the product.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Badge Format Form

Reference Topic:

Badge Format Tab

Administration Menu

If you experience difficulty with this form, contact GE Customer Support for assistance.

This form allows an operator to do the following:

• Import or export custom badge records in a Wiegand or magnetic stripe format, into the micros on

your Secure Perfect system.

• Identify the pattern of data bits (mask) of the badge numbers that you will importing or export to your

Secure Perfect system.

• Store standard custom badge format in the Secure Perfect database.

• Interpret data from badges presented at a Wiegand or magnetic stripe reader.

Element

Add

Description

Display or change an existing record.

Configure a new Badge Format record. Default values display for you.

Delete

Delete a selected Badge Format record from the list in the windowpane on the

right, that is no longer required or applicable.

Description

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this badge format. The field accepts 1

to 64 characters.

Example: 33 Bit Indala

Facility

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for

assignment by this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be

assigned for you.

Badge Format Tab

Configure the specific mask of this custom badge format. You cannot save this

record until you have completed the entries on this tab.

Camera Preset Form

Reference Topic:

Client Redundancy Overview

After setup and programming of your DVR devices to meet your monitoring requirements, you will need

to parallel the settings and positions in the Secure Perfect configurations. This form allows you to edit or

enter a description and number for a camera preset. Presets must be defined before you can assign

them to a camera on the Presets tab of the Camera Form.

This option is available for PTZ cameras only.

Description

In this field, enter or edit the description for the selected preset. This should be a unique name describing

or numbering a preset camera position.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by this

operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

CCTV Alarm Form

Reference Topic:

CCTV Tab

This form is used for serial interfaces that are interfaced to Secure Perfect. Following installation of

hardware and the CCTV interface software, you must create CCTV alarm records. This form is used to

set up CCTV alarms.

To locate and view existing records, click Search. When a list of records displays, you can edit an

existing record OR click Add to add a new record.

Description: Enter a description of this CCTV interface.

Facility: A facility option can be designated for the CCTV Alarm record from the Facility drop-down list.

Client Form

Reference Topics:

Client Tab

Backup Clients Tab

Networking

Use this form to add a client to the Secure Perfect network or assign backup clients.

Only systems licensed for Client Redundancy will have the ability to select backup clients.

Element

Add

Description

Click to display and view or edit an existing client record.

Click to add a new record. Note that default values display where appropriate.

Select a Client Name from the right windowpane and click to delete the client record .

Delete

Description*

Enter or edit a unique description for the client you are adding. If you do not enter a

description, this field automatically populates with the PC Name selected on the

Client tab.

Global Edition Client Descriptions: We recommend that your client description

include a meaningful name of the Global or Regional Database Server computer.

When the description displays on the Client Monitor Form, the Global and Regional

Server will be easily identifiable.

Example Description: bcttestpc(client to bcteeserver)

where bcttestpcis the name of the client computer and bcteeserveris the

name of the Regional Database Server for this client.

Facility

A facility option can be designated for your new client record from the Facility drop-

down list.

You must restart the Secure Perfect client program for changes to the Auto logoff selection to take

effect.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Client Group Form

Reference Topic:

Client Group Tab

Alarm Bumping and Routing Form

This form allows you to assign Secure Perfect client computers into logical groups. Members of a Client

Group cannot have conflicting Mode Schedules. A comment box is available for entry to describe the

reason for this group or configuration.

Client groups can be assigned to specific alarm routing and bumping configurations. You may want to

review the Sample Scenario in the Alarm Routing and Bumping Form Help topic.

Element

Add

Description

Display or change an existing record.

Configure a new record. Default values display for you.

Delete

Delete a selected record that is no longer required or applicable, from the list in the

windowpane on the right.

Descriptions

Facility

Enter a unique description that identifies this Client Group.

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment

by this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be assigned for

you.

Save

You cannot save this record until at least one client is assigned to this group on the

Client Group tab.

Diagnostic Setting Form

Reference Topic:

Settings Tab

Use this form to select items to monitor using the DiagView program.

Use this form with care. The more items you turn on for monitoring, the more your system

performance is affected. This is even more important when monitoring port, communications, or micro

items.

Click Search to display a list of components that you can monitor.

Description: Select a component from the list box in the right windowpane. The selected component

displays in the Description field as a read-only entry.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Event Schedule Form

Reference Topic:

Event Schedule s Tab

An event schedules when an action occurs, such as resetting an anti-passback status, dialing a micro, or

changing a physical reader type. There is no end time associated with an event. Events are comprised of

one or more times on one or more days of the week and modes. Events differ from time schedules in that

events define when an action occurs and time schedules define an interval of time over which an action

occurs. Note that an event can schedule an action multiple times, even within the same day. Once an

event is defined, it may be applied anywhere events are used.

Deleting an event schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect

of the deleted event schedule. An event will remain active until another event occurs to change it.

This form is used to create event schedules. Events define the day(s) of the week and time(s) an action

will start. Click Search to display a list of previously created event schedules or Add to add a new event.

Description

Enter a meaningful and unique 32-digit or less alphanumeric description for this event.

Event Tagging Overview

Reference Topic:

Event Trigger Form Completion

When a digital video camera is activated and associated with a reader event or alarm event, the

recording for that activity is tagged. During this tagging process, the camera remains actively recording

and then archives the recording to disk.

Once recorded, the recording can be retrieved by a search option based on the event tag. If the Event

Trigger that activated the tagging was defined as Tag as event instead of Tag only, the DVR would have

changed recording rate to a special event-recording rate for a period of time, as predefined during the

DVR setup and configuration.

When tagged events are identified by a search, retrieved, and viewed, the video playback begins at the

start of the event and continues playing until you elect to discontinue the playback.

Event triggers must be created on the Event Trigger Form, to define the logical rules that will initiate

event-driven video response.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Event Trigger Form Completion

Reference Topics:

The Event Trigger Form opens with the Preset/Camera tab displayed. An event consists of a camera and

either readers, alarms, or zone activity. A trigger causes an event or program routine to be executed,

depending on what options you set on the tabs of this form. Intrusion Zone activities can also trigger an

event.

Example: A camera begins recording in response to an invalid badge transaction. An alarm is recorded

in response to the badge transaction.

Element

Add

Description

Click to display or change an existing record.

Click to add a new record.

Delete

Select and then click to remove an Event Trigger record.

Description

Enter text up to 64 alphanumeric characters in length. The description should convey

specific information relating to a physical location, camera, reader, or state, such as.

Front Door Inv Badge Camera 1 Reader 1

You can assign a reader alarm or camera alarm or both and this can be reflected in

the description of the Trigger.

Save

Following the completion of applicable options for this record, click to save this

record. The selection results display in the columns of the form window on the right.

Facility Form

Reference Topic:

Facility Tab

Use this form to define facilities . Your database can be partitioned and related records can be grouped.

These groupings are called facilities. If facilities will be used, you must create Facility definitions in the

Secure Perfect system.

A facility option can be designated on MOST forms throughout the system and any number of

facilities can be defined.

Usually, the system administrator is assigned to all facilities. Operators can be assigned to one or more

facilities and can choose which facilities to be active at any given time. All records have the default Ignore

Facilities, which means the records are not under facility protection; therefore, those records are visible to

all operators.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Floor Form

Reference Topic:

Floor Tab

Use this form to associate a description to a floor number.

Click Add to add a new record OR Search and view or change an existing record.

Facility: A facility can be designated for the new Floor record from the Facility drop-down list.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Guard Tour Form

Reference Topics:

Guard Tour Tab

Activity Monitor

Guard Tour Tab - Manual Control Form

Administration Menu

This form is unavailable if you are not licensed for Guard Tour.

A Guard Tour is an inspection of your facility premises, made by a security officer at random intervals.

The officer stops at pre-determined tour points along the way, where a badge must be presented to a

reader or hit a DI point, so that the Secure Perfect system can track the tour progress. Each time the

officer presents a badge to a reader, a tour point is ‘hit.’ The following statements are true of Guard Tour

features:

•

Tour Point Form must be configured before a Guard Tour record is configured.

A Guard Tour must be configured before a physical tour can begin.

All tour points must be associated with micros within the same Region .

Tour points can be both readers and DIs.

The same badge must complete the entire tour. A badge can only be assigned to one tour at

a time.

•

The badge read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm.

Double-hit points by the tour badge along the tour result in invalid tour transactions.

A tour begins when the Start Point is ‘hit’ or manually started by the operator at a Secure

Perfect computer.

•

A tour ends when all points assigned to the tour are ‘hit,’ or at the expiration of the time

assigned for the duration of the tour. Also, a tour can be ended manually, by the operator at a

Secure Perfect computer.

•

An alarm is generated if a tour is not completed within the assigned maximum tour time.

Badge transactions are stored in badge history and available to generate reports.

DI tour points are assigned to only one tour.

Badges must be assigned to a tour in order to be a tour badge.

Requirements are indicated by an asterisk.

Element

Add

Description

Display or change an existing record.

Configure a new Guard Tour record. Default values display for you.

Delete

Delete a selected Guard Tour record from the list in the windowpane on the right,

that is no longer required or applicable. The associated alarm record for this Guard

Tour is simultaneously deleted.

If a tour is in progress, this record cannot be deleted or edited. Refer to the Activity

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Monitor or the Guard Tour tab of the Manual Control form for tour status.

Description*

Facility

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this tour. The field accepts 1 to 64

characters.

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment

by this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be assigned for

you.

Guard Tour Tab*

Configure the specifics of this tour. You cannot save this record until you have

completed the Tour tab.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right

mouse button.

Intrusion Zone Form Completion

Reference Topics:

Intrusion Zone Tab

Status Tab

Communication Settings Tab

Administration Menu

This option opens the Intrusion Zone Form that allows you to create or edit an Intrusion Zone record, then

assign related devices, based on the current operators’ facilities and permissions . If you are modifying an

existing zone configuration, it is recommended that you verify the state of the zone by obtaining a current

status.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and click the

right mouse button.

Description

Enter a unique description for the Intrusion Zone in this field.

In the process of saving a modified configuration, a dialog box will display: Please note, if zone is

currently armed, this update will disarm and rearm with your new configuration. Do you want to

continue? If you select Yes, the new configuration will save to the database. If you select No, your

changes will not be saved.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned for this intrusion zone record from the drop-down list of available

facilities for this operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

LogFile Form

Reference Topics:

LogFile Tab

Diagnostics Overview

The LogFile Form allows you to select a computer in your Secure Perfect network, set up a new logfile

(establish an identity for the file), and designate a path and directory in which to place your LogFile. All

log files should be saved in the Secure Perfect/Logsfolder; it will be easier to locate for backups

and upgrades. It is a shared folder, which means other clients can gain access to the log files.

Each client computer will have a set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that

machine. Diagnostic objects can be controlled remotely (turned on or off). All diagnostic objects can write

messages to a common default logfile or any diagnostic object can write to a separate log file created

and defined by the user.

Before any logfile can be deleted from Secure Perfect, you must re-assign diagnostic objects to another

logfile.

Mode Schedule Form

Reference Topic:

Mode Schedule Tab

Mode schedules define the date and time a mode goes into effect. The purpose of a mode is to allow the

micros to operate differently than predefined for Normal mode (Monday through Sunday, which is the

default mode of the Secure Perfect system). Operating modes are an administrative decision, as each

facility has unique requirements. For each mode, Secure Perfect micros will control its devices such as

readers and doors in a predefined way.

You may have a schedule configured, but never see a schedule change if you do not have the

schedule associated with an Alarm Routing and Bumping configuration.

Description: Click Search to edit an existing mode schedule or click New to add a new mode schedule.

• The Host PC and micros may be in different modes at the same time.

• Modes are not partitioned by facilities. If you need to use facilities in your system, create a mode

schedule for each facility. Use the facility description as a prefix on the Mode Schedule Form, in the

Description to indicate to which facility this mode will apply. For example: BocaHQ 8 to 5would

indicate a facility-specific mode, where BocaHQrefers to a geographic location.

• There are four possible modes. Normal is day-of-the-week dependent and it is the default mode for

the Secure Perfect system. The remaining three are not day-of-the-week dependent. Both schedules

and events can be defined in terms of modes. Sunday through Saturday configurations are only in

effect in Normalmode. Then, you could define Mode 1 as Half-Day Holiday, and Mode 2 as

Full-Day Holiday. Mode 3 might be Return to Normal.

Like events, there is no end time associated with a mode. The mode will remain active until changed

by another mode schedule.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Operator Form

Reference Topics:

Operator Tab

Facilities Tab

An operator is an individual who can access and control the Secure Perfect software.

To locate and view existing operator records, click Search. A list of operator records will display. You can

either click Add to add new operators OR search and view or change the existing list of operators on the

Secure Perfect system.

Once a facility is assigned to an operator, it will appear in the Facility field after a successful login by that

operator. Operators are associated with permissions that define the actions operators can perform within

SP. Use this form to configure operator records.

Facility

A facility can be assigned from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Override Form

Reference Topic:

Override Tab

Use this form to manually enter an In or Out status for badge transactions that you want to enter into the

history. This information can be used by those who create reports to track, view, and verify employee

transactions, pair In and Out transactions, or review total transactions.

Parameters Form

Reference Topics:

Clear Archive Tab

Password Tab

Complete the tabs of the Parameter Form to assign global settings used throughout the Secure Perfect

system. You will want to configure the global system parameters before you begin loading your database

by creating records and assigning permissions.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Permission Form

Reference Topic:

Permission Tab

The forms in Secure Perfect will display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned

to this operator. The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here.

Use the Permission Form to create permission records.

Permissions and facilities must be created before they are assigned to operators. Permissions are

assigned to operators and define what operators can do within SP.

To locate and view existing permission records, click Search. A list of records will display. You can either

click Add to add a new permission OR search and view or change an existing permission.

Description: Enter a description for the permission.

Secure Perfect comes with a System Administrator permission that allows full action on all forms. You

can create more restrictive permissions and apply the System Administrator permission ONLY to those

operators fully trained in SP.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Region Form

Reference Topics:

Region Form Tab

Backup Regions Tab

APB Region Configuration

Welcome

This form displays if you are licensed for Global Edition software. Refer to the Secure Perfect Installation

Guide for complete details of the Global Edition features. When a Server computer is added to a Secure

Perfect Global Edition system, Region Form records are also created. You cannot delete a Region Form

record.

The Region Form allows you to assign or edit the frequency of synchronization intervals for your Global

Edition database replication. Global Edition systems can also be configured for database redundancy, at

the Regional level. A Regional Database Server can be configured to have backup Servers in the event

of a failure at the default Regional Server. Additionally, APB options are available for configuration in the

selected Region.

REMINDER: A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated. It

defines what publication will be received, where, and when. The time that it takes to complete this

process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be

synchronized.

Description

Click Search to display a list of Database Servers in your Secure Perfect system. Select one of the

Database Servers from the list box in the right windowpane. The selected server name now displays in

the Description field.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

SP Auto Update Configuration Form

Administration Menu

Use this form to configure your Secure Perfect network computer for automatic notification and

installation of the latest Quick Fixes and Service Packs. This feature must be coordinated with your IT

Department. They may have certain procedures, restrictions, or security policies in place.

Enable Auto Update: Select this check box to enable the Check for Update item of the File menu.

Settings:

HTTP Server Path: This is the Server to which you need to connect in order to search for available

updates. This field may look something like the following: http://ge-interlogix.com

HTTP Server User Name: Enter the User Name used to reach the HTTP Server, if required.

HTTP Server Password: Enter the password used to reach the HTTP Server, if required.

Repeat HTTP Server Password: Enter the password used to reach the HTTP Server, a second time as

a security check.

Secure Perfect supports Basic Authenication only and not Integrated Windows Authenication.

Product Update Available:

Notify Clients Immediatlely that Product Update is Available: Select this check box to automatically

notify client computers that a product update is available.

Update Message Text: In this box, enter a message that will display in a popup, notifying client

computers that a product update is available.

OK: Click this button when configuration is complete. The entries on this window are saved.

Cancel: Click this button to terminate and close this window. The entries will not be saved.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Time Schedule Form

Reference Topic:

Time Schedules Tab

Administration Menu

Time schedules define the day(s) of the week and time(s) an action will start AND end.

This form is used to create time schedules. A time schedule determines when an action will occur, such

as turning on alarm monitoring. Time schedules are comprised of one or more time intervals (start and

stop times) on one or more days of the week and modes. Time schedules differ from events in that time

schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs while events schedule when an action

occurs. Note that a time schedule can define an action multiple times, even within the same day. Once a

time schedule is defined, it can be applied anywhere time schedules are used.

Deleting a time schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect of

the deleted schedule. If you delete a schedule while it is currently active, this schedule will never end.

Time schedules are not partitioned by facilities . If you need to use facilities in your system, create an

event for each facility. Use the facility description as a prefix on the Time Schedule Form, Description to

indicate to which facility this event will apply.

Example: BocaHQ Normal Workweekwould indicate a facility-specific time schedule, where BocaHQ

refers to a geographic location. For example, you can create a time schedule that is active Monday

through Friday 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. This particular time schedule (perhaps called Normal Workweek)

can be applied to the Access Right for Permanent Employees and you may want to turn off alarm

monitoring during those hours.

The maximum number of supported time schedules for any one micro is 1,023. Click Search to display a

list of previously created time schedules or Add to add a new schedule.

Description

Enter a meaningful and unique 32-digit or less alphanumeric description for this schedule.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Tour Point Form

Reference Topic:

Tour Point Tab

Administration Menu

This form is unavailable if you are not licensed for Guard Tour.

A Guard Tour is an inspection of your facility premises, made by a security officer at random intervals.

The officer stops at pre-determined tour points along the way, where a badge must be presented to a

reader or DI point so that the Secure Perfect system can track the badge progress. Each time the officer

presents a badge to a reader, a tour point is ‘hit.’

•

Tour Points and a Guard Tours record must be created before a tour can begin.

Tour points can be any readers or DIs that are not on a dialup micro.

DIs must be configured as a DI type of Guard Tour.

DI points can only be assigned to one Guard Tour.

Reader tour points can be assigned to any tours and any number of tours.

All tour points must be associated with micros within the same Region .

The badge read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm.

Double-hit points along the tour result in invalid tour transactions.

Badge transactions are stored in badge history and available to generate reports.

A badge must be assigned to the tour.

Additional statements relating to Guard Tours are listed in the Guard Tours topic of this Help file.

Requirements are indicated by an asterisk.

Element

Description

Click to display or change an existing Guard Tour point record. If this is a Secure

Perfect Global Edition, points that display are limited to the active Region. You

cannot edit a Guard Tour Point if it is assigned to a Guard Tour.

Add

Click to configure a new Tour Point record.

Delete

Click to delete a selected Tour Point record from the list in the windowpane on the

right, that is no longer required and is not assigned to an existing Guard Tour. If this

is a Secure Perfect Global Edition, points that display are limited to the active Region.

Description*

Facility

Enter a unique or suggestive description for this tour point. The field accepts 1 to 64

characters.

Assign a facility option from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by

this operator. If you do not select a facility, Ignore Facilities will be assigned for you.

Tour Point Tab*

Configure a reader or digital input. You cannot save this record until you have

completed the Tour Point tab.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Reporting Capabilities

Overview - Reports

Reference Topics:

Report Templates Window

Secure Perfect provides extensive reporting capabilities based on your system configuration. All reports

are selections on the Secure Perfect Reports drop-down menu.

Reports are filtered so that supplied information pertains only to the selected facilities of the current

operator.

A list of standard reports is provided below. Seven are history reports. In addition, Secure Perfect

has the ability to access reports created by using a third-party report generator. The following is a

brief description of each report:

1. Person : Provides person information, such as address and department, on all or a subset of

persons in the system.

2. Badge : Provides information in areas you select on all or a subset of badges in the system.

3. Administration : Generates reports about the administrative areas of the system. Reports cover

alarm instructions, events, event triggers, parameters, operators, permissions, responses,

schedules, clients, e-mail notification, and intrusion zones.

4. Device Configuration : Generates reports about the devices in the system, such as readers,

alarms, cameras, and digital video recorders.

5. Schedules/Events : Lists the schedules and events assigned for each micro.

6. Floor Access : Provides a list of floors defined in the system and the access granted to each one.

7. Reader Access : Provides a list of persons who have access to the specified reader(s); that is, who

has access where.

8. Roll Call : Provides a list of the last access granted to any or all persons in the system; that is, who

last went where based on individual badge activity.

9. Alarm History : Generates reports on alarm transactions.

10. Badge History : Generates reports on badge transactions.

11. Zone History : Generates reports on intrusion zone transactions.

12. DI History : Generates reports on digital input transactions.

13. Time and Attendance History : Generates reports on the number of hours employees were in their

facilities.

14. Operator History : Generates reports on operator actions relating to operations on Secure Perfect

forms.

15. Guard Tour History : Generates sets of Guard Tour activities containing start points, hits, invalid

points, pauses, resumes, tour end points, and tour time exceeded.

16. External Reports: The External Reports option opens the Launch External Reports window,

allowing you to access an executable application or report that was not created within SP. For

example, you may want to access a report created by a third party report generator such as Crystal

Reports or Microsoft Access 2002. Within SP, you can navigate to the application or folder, select

the file, and click to Open, once the report has been created and saved in a folder. This is a view

only function; you cannot launch Access or edit entries.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Reports

Administration Report

Reference Topics:

Generates reports about the administration and organization of your Secure Perfect system.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: The Templates button is for saving a template or making it a default.

Alarm History Report Form

Reference Topics:

This form generates reports based on alarm transactions.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make the displaying template the default.

Badge History Report Form

Reference Topics:

Additional Filters Tab

Date Range Tab

Database Tab

Generates reports based on badge transactions.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Badge Report Form

Reference Topics:

Expiration Date Filter Tab

Return Date Filter Tab

This report provides information in areas you select on all or a subset of badges in the system.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: The Templates button is for saving a template or making it the default.

Device Report Form

Reference Topics:

This form generates reports about the devices in the system. Device Reports cover alarms, alarm groups,

digital inputs, digital outputs, digital output groups, elevators, cameras, digital video recorders, micros,

and readers.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: This button is for saving a template or making it a default.

DI History Report Form

Reference Topics:

Generates reports on digital input history transactions.

Template: Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Floor Access Report Form

Reference Topics:

This report lists the people who have access to floors.

Template: Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make the displaying template the default.

Guard Tour History Report Form

Reference Topics:

Generates reports that include such information as start points, hits, invalid points, pauses, resumes, and

tour end points.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Operator History Report Form

Reference Topics:

Generates reports on operator actions.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Person Report

Reference Topics:

Additional Filters Tab

Overview - Reports

This report provides personal information, such as address, department, badge, access rights, and user

fields on all or a subset of persons in the system.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: The Templates button is for saving a template or making it the default.

Reader Access Report Form

Reference Topics:

Readers Tab

This report provides a list of persons who have access to the specified reader(s); that is, who has access

where.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make the displaying template the default.

Roll Call Report Form

Reference Topics:

This report provides a list of the last access granted to any or all persons in the system and each of their

badges; that is, who last went where.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: This button is for saving a template or making it the default.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Schedule Report Form

Reference Topics:

This report lists the schedules and events assigned for each micro.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Time and Attendance History Report Form

Reference Topics:

Generates reports on time and attendance transactions.

Template : Displays the name of the currently loaded template, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Zone History Report Form

Template: Displays the name of the currently loaded templete, if there is one.

Templates: Click to save a template or make it the default.

Reference Topics:

General Tab allows you to set parameters of the form and the method to use for grouping and presenting

the information.

Filters Tab allows you to limit the person or badgeholder records printed on this report.

Additional Filters Tab allows you to limit the type of records printed on this report.

Date Range Tab allows you to select the date and time range on which the report should be based.

Database Tab allows you to select the history file you want to report on. You can select the default listed

on the tab or select the archived history file.

Fonts Tab allows you to select the fonts you want to use in the report.

Generates reports on intrusion zone transactions.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Troubleshooting and Help

Customer Support

If you require assistance, first contact your local Business Partner.

To contact GE Security, use the following numbers and addresses:

Telephone

FAX

1 888 GE SECURITY (437-3287)

561 998 6244

Web Site

Training

www.ge-security.comSupport

[email protected]

Documentation

Check the Web site periodically for timely information on all GE Security products.

Help Menu Selections

The following selections display in the Help drop-down menu:

Help Topics

Can I customize the toolbar and add more buttons?

Overview - Diagnostics

Reference Topic:

LogFile Form

Diagnostics

Secure Perfect provides an extensive and convenient diagnostic utility to turn the monitoring of Secure

Perfect system components on and off. To display debug messages in the Diagnostics Log within SP, the

diagnostics for that component you want to monitor must be turned on. Each client computer will have a

set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that computer.

For each client, Secure Perfect creates a default logfile (others can be created) for each day of the week

such as SPEEFriday.spl. This file is overwritten each week, thus creating a new log for that day.

During normal operation of SP, informational as well as debug messages are written to the daily log file.

Under abnormal conditions, the log file may also contain warning and/or fatal messages indicating failure

conditions.

Additionally, for each client, there is a log located in the WINNT\system32folder. Under normal system

operation, this log will be empty. It will be used to log messages if the server and the database cannot be

reached.

DiagView is a separate program within Secure Perfect. To access DiagView, select Diagnostic Viewer

from the Administration menu. It operates in "real time." That is, every time Secure Perfect writes an entry

to the log file, DiagView automatically displays the latest message. By default, DiagView displays only the

latest 1000 messages. The number of displayed messages can be changed on the DiagView,

Preferences form.

All log files should be saved in the Secure Perfect/Logsfolder; it will be easier to locate for backups

and upgrades. It is a shared folder, which means other clients can gain access to the log files.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Remote Diagnostics

If you purchased your computer from GE Security, the program pcANYWHERE was included. If you are

experiencing problems, this program allows your GE Security Business Partner or Support Center

personnel to dial into your Secure Perfect computer and observe the situation, thus providing a quicker

response and resolution time.

The LogFile Form allows you to select your computer, set up a new logfile (establish an identity for the

file), and designate a path and directory in which to place your LogFile.

Troubleshooting

While Secure Perfect was created to be as user-friendly as possible, this topic is created to assist you

with answers to frequently asked questions. Click to display the linked topic.

Software:

How do I perform a search on a specific item?

Why can't I delete a record?

No readers display in the reader list box. Why?

Why are there no alarms displayed on the Alarm Monitor Form?

How do I put a reader online?

I deleted all the records on one of my forms. I clicked Add to add a record and the text <deleted> displays

and sometimes information from the previous record. How do I get rid of the text <deleted>?

Our site uses SP in two languages. Sometimes, when we log in, the Help files are not in the correct

language. Why?

How do I remove an alarm from the Alarm Monitor Form?

How do I troubleshoot my Global Edition system?

Setup:

Why aren't the supervised DI points on my 2SRP board working?

Dial-Up Troubleshooting Tips : While some information is automatically saved to the logfile, you can

decide whether certain items (ports, lines, micro, or forms) will be sent to the logfile. Select Diagnostic

Settings from the Administration menu. For more persistent problems, Secure Perfect provides an

extensive diagnostic utility, Diagview. DiagView allows you to view the diagnostic log file, apply filters to

view information, and search for a specific log entry. Diagview has its own Help system for additional

information.

Why does the host dial a micro?

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Index of 'Show me' Demo Files

Index of 'Show Me' Demo Files

This is a comprehensive list of all demonstration files displayed throughout this Help system. The demo

files are in English only. Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo. There is a

short pause as the demo begins.

Demo Title

Alarm Monitor

Backing Up a Secure Perfect Professional/eZ System

Backing Up a Secure Perfect Enterprise Edition System

Badge Assignment

DVR to Online

Intrusion Zone Arm/Disarm

Mass Updates

Manual Control: Unlock a Door

Online Help Contents

Online Help Index

Online Help Search

Person Record Creation

Report Export

Report Generation: History Report

Report Generation: Person Report

Report Template

Restoring Secure Perfect on an eZ/ Professional System

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Restoring Secure Perfect on an Enterprise Edition System

Video – Recording and Playing Back

Video Save

Video Search – General Event Tab

Video Search – General Playback Tab

Video Search – Motion Tab

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Reference Topics (Elements, Descriptions)

About Secure Perfect

Help Menu

Selection of this option opens a screen displaying the Secure Perfect software version, service pack

number, copyright information, licensing information, and contact information.

A sample window for a Secure Perfect system might display as follows:

Access Right

Personnel Menu

The Access Right option displays the Access Right Form that allows you to assign when (using a time

schedule or allowing access at all times) and where (using readers) access is given, that is then assigned

to a person.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Access Rights Assignment

Select from the Available list those access rights you want to assign to this person. The access rights

that display in this list are those that were previously set up on the Access Rights Form. Only access

rights in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, then click the right arrow to assign an available access right.

Select, then click the left arrow to unassign an access right.

Access Rights Tab

Access Right Form

Use this tab to create and define access right records.

•

Assigned readers: This windowpane lists all readers currently assigned to this access right.

Assign Readers: Click to display the Reader Assignment dialog box and select from a list of

readers available for assignment by this operator. If no readers are listed, check that the

readers have been marked Active on the Readers tab of the Reader Form.

Access control:

•

Allow access at all times: Select this option to allow access all the time, in all modes.

Allow access by schedule: Select this option to assign a time schedule to this access right.

The time schedule governs when the access right grants access to the assigned readers.

Time schedule: If you selected Allow access by schedule, this field is now available to select

a time schedule from the drop-down list of previously created time schedules.

•

If you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an Intrusion Zone due to a schedule in that

access right, you will not be able to arm/disarm a zone.

Access Rights Tab

Person Form

Use this tab to assign access rights to this person.

Assigned access rights

This windowpane lists any currently assigned access rights.

Assign

Click to display the Access Rights Assignment dialog box, enabling you to select the access rights you

want to assign or unassign for this badgeholder.

Activity Monitor

Operations Menu

The Activity Monitor option opens the Activity Monitor Form that allows you to monitor badge and

intrusion zone transactions. The shortcut key combination for Activity Monitor Form is CTRL+A.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Activity Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Options of the shortcut menu are as follows:

Resume: Starts the scrolling of badge transactions. This option will be active only if you previously

selected Pause. All badge transactions that occurred while the Pause option was on will be displayed

once you select Resume.

Pause: Suspends scrolling of badge transactions on the Activity Monitor.

Clear: Clears all badge transactions from the Activity Monitor.

Swipe and Show Readers: Select to display an Edit Readers List assignment form. Select those

readers you want monitored in the Swipe and Show window. If readers have not been selected, the

Swipe and Show program will not start.

Launch Swipe and Show: Starts the Swipe and Show program. Only one instance of Swipe and Show

is available for display on a computer at one time. If Imaging is not licensed for the system, this option is

not available.

Badge: Displays the Badge Form, making available the selected badge record.

View Live Video: Accesses live video from the camera(s) associated with the reader’s badge transaction

as defined by its event trigger. In order to view live video, the DVR must be online (if it is a duplex

recorder, the recorder must also be in record mode). The following windows open:

•

The Digital Video Viewer. (Refer to Digital Video Viewer Help for information about the Digital

Video Viewer.)

•

Video window(s) displaying the current live view of the camera(s) associated with the badge

transaction. Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time.

View Recorded Video: Accesses previously recorded video from the camera(s) associated with the

reader’s badge transaction as defined by its event trigger. In order to view recorded video, the DVR must

be online and available. The DVR cannot be serving another request for playback of any recorded video

event. The following windows open:

•

The Digital Video Viewer. (Refer to Digital Video Viewer Help for information about the Digital

Video Viewer.)

•

Video window(s) displaying the recorded video associated with the badge transaction. Each

window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time.

View Single Recorded Frame: Select to display the first frame of the event recording as a still photo.

Quick Launch: Accesses live and recorded video from camera(s) associated with the reader’s badge

transaction as defined by its event trigger.

A message dialog will display if video is not available because associated cameras are not assigned

to the current active facility.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Activity Monitor Form Toolbar

Reference Topic:

Activity Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

The Activity Monitor Form toolbar consists of the following options:

Click

Resume or restart the scrolling of badge transactions.

Pause or suspend the scrolling of badge transactions.

Clear all badge transactions.

Display an Edit Readers List dialog.

Start the Swipe and Show program. This option will not

be available if the system is not licensed for Imaging or

readers have not been selected.

Add Map

An Add Map dialog box displays when you click Add Record on the Secure Perfect toolbar while the

Alarm Graphics Editor window is displayed, allowing you to navigate to a file source for an existing map.

Description

Enter a description of the type of map. Example: Overview of Main Building.

Facility

A facility option can be assigned from the drop-down list of available facilities for assignment by this

operator.

File

Enter the full pathname of the file or click Browse to navigate, locate, and select the file. Secure Perfect

supports map files in the Windows MetaFile format (.wmf or .emf).

Add New Icon to Database

Alarm Graphics Viewer Form

Click to import your own icon files to the list of available icons used in the previous three fields to

represent a specific alarm state. Icon files must be .ico format.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Adding Sound to an Alarm

If you would like to hear a sound from the Secure Perfect computer when an alarm occurs, follow the

steps below:

You MUST have a sound card in your computer!

1. Click Start, Settings, then Control Panel.

2. From the Control Panel window, double-click the Sounds and Multimedia icon.

3. In Sound Events, scroll to Secure Perfect.

4. Select the alarm to which you want to assign sound; then select the sound you want for that alarm.

5. Click OK to save the change and exit the window or Apply to save that change and add more sounds.

6. Start SP; select Administration, then Parameters.

7. On the Settings tab of the Parameters Form, verify that the Console alarm sound field is set for the

results you anticipate (either Continuous or Short).

Additional Filters Tab

Person Report

This tab displays ONLY if you have selected User Data in the field Report Type on the General Tab of the

Person Report. Use this tab to add user fields as an additional filter for the report.

•

User Fields: This window lists all the user fields, the user field value you want to use as a

filter, and whether the user field should print. (You can print the user field on the report by

selecting the field Print selected user field or deselect this field so the user field will not print.)

Modify Value: To change the value of a user field, select the user field you want and enter a

new value in this field.

User fields printed on report: If this field is enabled, then the currently selected user field will

print on the report.

Clear All/Set All: Click Clear All so that none of the User Fields are set to print. Click Set All

to set all of the User Fields to print.

•

Print selected user field: Enable this field to set the selected User Field to print or disable this

field so that the selected User Field does not print.

Additional Filters Tab - Badge History Report Form

Use this tab to select additional, specific criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Micro: Select the micro you want to use to generate report information. If you want to use all

micros, select <ALL>.

Reader: Select the reader you want to use to generate report information. If you want to use

all readers, select <ALL>.

Department: Select the department you want to use to generate report information. If you

want to use all departments, select <ALL>.

Activity: Select the badge activity you want to use to filter report information, such as Duress

Invalid, Duress Valid, Duress Valid No Passage, Duress Valid Open, Guard Tour Activity,

Invalid, Invalid APB In, Invalid APB Out, Invalid Floor, Invalid PIN, Invalid T&A In, Invalid T&A

Out, Invalid Timed APB, Lost, Max Invalid PIN, Overdue, Override, Unknown, Valid, Valid No

Passage, and Valid Open. If you want to use all activities, select <ALL>.

Logical Reader Type: Select the logical reader type that you want to use to limit the report,

such as APB In, APB In or Out, APB Out, Elevator, In Required, Normal, T&A In, T&A In and

Out, T&A In or Out, or T&A Out. If you want to use all the logical reader types, select <ALL>.

Floor Description: Select the range of floor descriptions you want to display on the report. If

you want to list all floor descriptions, leave these fields blank.

•

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Additional Filters Tab - Zone History Report

Use this tab to select additional, specific source criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Activity Type: Select the type of activity to use in generating this report. If you want to use all

intrusions zone activity type messages, select <ALL>.

Locaton : Select the source of the zone activity as a Badge, Digital Input, Manual, Micro, or

<ALL>.

Device Description: Enter the range of device descriptions on which you want to report.

Leave blank for all descriptions.

Micro Description: Enter the range of micro descriptions you want to use to generate report

information. If you want to use all micros, select <ALL>.

Address Fields Tab

Parameters Form

Use this tab to modify the labels of the address fields. These labels are used on the Person Form.

Address 1/Address 2/Address 3/Address 4/Address 5

Displays the current label. To edit or create a new label, select and enter text over the existing text. The

address field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters in length.

Click Save before you exit this form.

Administration

Reports Menu

The Administration option opens the Administration Report Form that allows you to create a report on

the administrative aspects of your Secure Perfect system, such as alarm instructions, events, host

parameters, operators, permissions, responses, schedules, archives, client, and floors.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Administration Menu Selections

The following selections display in the Administration drop-down menu:

Permission

Response

Alarm Routing and Bumping

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm

Device Menu

The Alarm option displays the Alarm Form that allows you to modify records that are automatically

generated when you define a micro. It also displays alarms created from Digital Inputs.

Alarm Assignment

This window displays a list of alarms in the Secure Perfect system for the facilities available for

assignment by this operator. All alarms display. If this is a Global Edition system, alarms are not filtered

by Region.

•

Select, then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm.

Select, then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm.

Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane.

Alarm Bumping Client Group Assignment Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select and assign Client Groups for this bumping record. Only Client

Groups in the operator’s facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available Client Group.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a Client Group.

Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Bumping, Client Groups windowpane.

Alarm/Digital Input Tab

Manual Control

Manually monitor alarms and DIs (digital Input points) depending on the current operator’s facilities and

permissions .

There may be schedules in effect that will override manually controlled changes if schedule override

is selected; otherwise, the manual control selection is truly indefinitely.

Select type

Select one of the alarm/DI types from the drop-down list:

•

Alarms

Alarm Groups

Digital Input

Nothing will display in the list box until you choose a micro option.

Select micro

Select a micro option.

•

All displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator’s facilities for all micros.

By Micro displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator’s facilities for a specific micro.

Columns in Windowpane

•

Description: Description of the Alarm/DI in the database.

Micro: Micro on which the Alarm/DI is located.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Set state to:

The names of the buttons change depending on the DI type (Alarm or Other) selected.

If an Alarm or Alarm Group is selected, click . . .

•

Monitor On: To monitor the selected alarms or alarm groups. Setting Monitor On will display the

alarms on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Monitor Off: To immediately discontinue monitoring the selected alarms or alarm groups. Setting

Monitor Off will not display alarms on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Indefinite: To make the change permanent. This selection does not allow it to be overridden by a

schedule (can be monitor ON or OFF).

Sched. Override: To change the state of the monitoring by a schedule override. For example, use

Sched. Override to monitor an alarm until a schedule overrides it. If you don’t want the schedule to

stop the monitoring, click Indefinite.

If a DI is selected, click . . .

•

Enable: To enable the selected DI on the micro so a state change will be reported.

Disable: To immediately disable the selected DI on the micro so its state changes will not be reported

to the host or trip a Digital Output.

•

Indefinite: To Enable or Disable permanently.

Sched. Override: Use this option to change operation state of a DI if you want a schedule to override

its setting. For example, use Sched. Override to control operation of the DI until a schedule takes

over. If you don’t want a schedule to control activation of a DI, use the On Indefinite selection.

Purpose

Enter an explanation for monitoring an alarm or enabling/disabling DI points. This field accepts 255

alphanumeric characters. These comments are written to the operator history field and display on the

Operator History Report, Purpose Field.

Alarm Graphics Editor

Operations Menu

The Alarm Graphics Editor option opens the Alarm Graphics Editor that allows you to add icons on

graphical map views to point out the location and type of incoming alarms. You cannot create a map

using SP; create it using the program of your choice and save it in .WMF or .EMF format.

Alarm Graphics Viewer

Operations Menu

The Alarm Graphics Viewer option opens the Alarm Graphics Viewer that allows you to view the maps

of your facility that were created. These maps point out the location and type of incoming alarms. The

shortcut key combination for Alarm Graphics Viewer is CTRL+V.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Graphics Viewer Shortcut Menu

Operator permissions for the Alarm Graphics Viewer must be assigned to ‘Update’ in order to view

and select right-click menu options. Points, alarms, DIs, and DOs do not display if not in the operator’s

facility. For shortcut menu functionality, move your mouse pointer to an assigned point and click the right

mouse button. The shortcut menu that displays with a right-click mouse button depends on the Point

Type assigned.

Element

Description

•

Alarm Monitor Form

Displays the Alarm Monitor form. This is the right-click menu

option when mouse pointer is not on an assigned map point.

Alarm Point Right-Click

Menu Options:

•

Alarm Monitor Form

Monitor On Indefinite

Displays the Alarm Monitor form.

Activates the assigned alarm. The alarm will remain active

until you manually turn it off.

•

Monitor Off Indefinite

Immediately deactivates the alarm.

Monitor On Schedule Override

Immediately activates this alarm and the schedule overrides

any active setting.

•

Monitor Off Schedule Override

Immediately deactivates this alarm and the schedule overrides

any active setting.

Digit Input Point Right-Click

Menu Options:

•

Enable On Indefinite

Enables this DI and will remain enabled until you change the

state manually.

Enable Off Indefinite

Disables this DI and this DI will remain Off until you change

the state manually.

Enable On Schedule Override

Enable Off Schedule Override

Immediately activates this digital input and a schedule can

override any active setting for this digital input.

Immediately deactivates the digital input and a schedule can

override any active setting for this digital input.

Digit Output Point Right-Click

Menu Options:

•

Unlock Reader/On for Duration

Unlock Reader Indefinitely/On

Lock Reader/Off

Immediately unlocks the reader or turns on the DO and

remains unlocked for the specified ‘On Time.’

Immediately unlocks the reader or turns on the DO associated

with this reader and remains unlocked indefinately.

Immediately locks the reader or turns off the DO associated

with this reader.

Unlock Reader Schedule Override

Immediately unlocks the reader or turns on the DO associated

with this reader and the schedule overrides any active setting.

Alarm Group

Device Menu

The Alarm Group option opens the Alarm Group Form that allows you to assign alarms into groups or

sets for scheduling purposes. Example: To apply a schedule to a series of alarms, apply the schedule to

a group that contains the specific alarms.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm History

Reports Menu

The Alarm History option opens the Alarm History Report Form that allows you to create a report based

on the history of alarm activity.

Alarm Instruction Assignment

This window displays when you click Edit, allowing you to modify the list of alarm instructions assigned to

this alarm. Only alarm instructions in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available instruction. A maximum of six alarm

instructions can be assigned.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign an instruction.

Click OK to display results in the Instruction windowpane of the Alarm Form.

Alarm Instruction Tab

Use this tab to create instructions on how to react to alarms. The instructions should belong to the same

facility as the alarm with which they will be associated.

•

Number: Assign a number to the instruction records. The range for alarm instructions is 0 to

254 for a total of 255 instructions.

•

Instructions: Enter the text you want to display when the associated alarm occurs. The

instruction can be 0 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length.

Alarm Monitor

Operations Menu

The Alarm Monitor option opens the Alarm Monitor Form that allows you to monitor alarm activity. The

shortcut key combination for Alarm Monitor Form is CTRL+M.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Reference Topic:

Alarm Monitor Form Toolbar

Select

Show Inactive

Alarms

Display alarms in an inactive state and removed from view. These

alarms were previously acknowledged or purged from the Alarm

Monitor. This is a toggle election and is a way to display previous

alarm activity without running a report.

Alarm

Opens the Alarm Form, allowing you to modify or view that

particular alarm record.

Alarm Graphics

Viewer

Opens the Alarm Graphics Viewer Form, allowing you to view the

alarm graphics map to which the alarm belongs.

Alarm Graphics

Editor

Opens the Alarm Graphics Editor Form, allowing you to create or

edit a graphical view of alarm states for the alarms you select.

View Live Video

(If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description,

this option is not available.) If an alarm transaction is displayed with

a camera icon to the left of the alarm description, right-click to view

live video from the camera(s) associated with the alarm’s

transaction as defined by its event trigger. Refer to Video Windows

- An Overview topic in this Help system for window management

information.

In order to view live video, the DVR must be online (if it is a

duplex recorder, the recorder must also be in record mode).

The following windows open: 1) Digital Video Viewer. Refer to

Digital Video Viewer Help for information about the Digital Video

Viewer. 2) Video window(s) displaying the current live view of the

camera(s) associated with the alarm transaction. Each window

displays a dialog box containing the current date and time.

View Recorded

Video

(If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description,

this option is not available.) If an alarm transaction is displayed with

a camera icon to the left of the alarm description, select to view live

video from the camera(s) associated with the alarm’s transaction as

defined by its event trigger. Refer to Video Windows - An Overview

for window management information.

In order to view recorded video, the DVR must be online and

available, and not serving another request for playback of recorded

video based on this event.

The following windows open: 1) Digital Video Viewer window. Refer

to Digital Video Viewer Help for information about the Digital Video

Viewer. 2) Video window(s) displaying the current live view of the

camera(s) associated with the alarm transaction. Each window

displays a dialog box containing the current date and time.

View Single

Recorded Frame

Select to display the first frame of the event recording as a still

photo.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Quick Launch

Select to automatically access live and recorded video from the

camera(s) associated with the alarm’s transaction as defined by its

event trigger. Refer to Video Windows - An Overview for window

management information.

In order to view live and recorded video, the DVR must be

online and available, and not serving another request for playback

of recorded video based on this event.

The following windows open: 1) Digital Video Viewer; 2) Video

window(s) displaying the current live view of the camera(s)

associated with the alarm transaction. Each window displays a

dialog box containing the current date and time. For additional

information, click Help on the Digital Video Viewer window.

Alarm Monitor Form Toolbar

Reference Topic:

Alarm Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Click

Remove all alarms from the Alarm Monitor.

Remove an individual alarm from the Alarm

Monitor.

Alarm Notifier

Administration Menu

The Alarm Notifier option opens the Alarm Notifier form, allowing you to accomplish the following:

•

Assign the alarms/resets that will trigger an e-mail message.

Assign people who will receive e-mail notification of the alarm condition.

Format the e-mail message.

Alarm Response Tab

Reference Topic:

Alarm Monitoring Using the Alarm Monitor Form

Alarm Response Form

Use this tab to enter a predefined alarm response. This multi-line dialog box accepts 64 alphanumeric

characters. The responses you create and save will display as selections on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Alarm Routing and Bumping

Administration Menu Item

The Alarm Routing and Bumping option opens the Alarm Routing and Bumping form, allowing you to

do the following:

• Route alarms to one or more Client Groups by time schedule or at all times.

• Bump alarms to one or more Client Groups following a time lapse of an unacknowledged or

unpurged alarm to the Client Groups selected for bumping.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

Alarm Routing Client Group Assignment Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select and assign Client Groups for this routing record. Only Client Groups

in the operator’s facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available Client Group.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a Client Group.

Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Routing, Client Groups windowpane.

Alarm Selection Tab

Alarm Notifier Form

The Alarm Selection tab allows you to assign alarms in this operators’ facility that will trigger an e-mail

message.

Assigned Alarms:

This windowpane displays any previously assigned alarms.

Assign Alarms

Click Assign Alarms to display the Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows you to select specific alarms

that will trigger e-mail notifications. Click OK and the selected alarms will display in the Assigned Alarms

windowpane.

Transaction Type

Select one or both transaction types that will trigger an e-mail alarm notification.

•

Alarm: E-mail notification is sent at onset of the alarm.

Reset: E-mail notification is sent when an alarm is reset.

By default, no type is selected when you create a new Alarm Notifier record. A transaction type must be

selected in order to save this record.

Alarm Sense Time

This form allows you to add or edit the link between an event and an alarm sense time. The event

determines when and to what value the sense times for all alarms in the group are changed.

•

Event: Select an event from the drop-down list. If there are no events listed, you will need to

configure events using the Event Schedule Form.

•

New time: Select or enter a sense time. The value is in seconds and indicates the delay

before triggering an associated digital output or sending in a Secure Perfect alarm if the DI

type is Alarm. This number tells the system how many seconds to wait after sensing the input

has changed to Active State. Enter 00to immediately send the transaction to the host,

notifying the host of a state change. Increase the Sense Time entry if using noisy or

chattering contacts.

Example: This value could indicate the delay time, in seconds, that elapses between the time a door

contact is broken and the time the output and alarms are triggered. If door contact is re-established

before the sense time elapses, the alarm would not come in to Secure Perfect and the output would not

activate.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

100

Alarm Tab

Alarm Form

The Alarm Tab configures the alarm.

Group: Displays the alarm group to which this alarm was assigned. The default is alarm group 0. You

can change to any other alarm group available on that micro, displayed on the drop-down list.

Owner Type: This is a read-only field and displays the object to which the alarm belongs or refers.

•

API: Alarm is bi-directional and owned by the external interface.

Board: Alarm is owned by the microcontroller.

CCTV Interface: Alarm is owned by an interface.

Client: Alarm is owned by a Regional Database client.

Digital Input: Alarm is owned by the digital input, such as a motion sensor. (The 11^thDI on a

Micro/PX-2000 or M/PXN-2000 is owned by the micro; it is a low-battery alarm from the

micro.)

•

Failover: Alarm is owned by the host client.

Guard Tour: Alarm is owned by a reader or digital input.

Kalatel Camera: Alarm is owned by a Kalatel camera.

Kalatel DVMR: Alarm is owned by a Kalatel DVR.

Micro: Alarm is owned by a micro.

Reader: Alarm is owned by a reader.

Region Failover: Alarm is owned by the host Regional Database Server.

Settings:

•

Monitor (Alarm, Short, Cut, Reset): If selected, this alarm, when triggered, will display all

alarm conditions available to this alarm on the Alarm Monitor Form. You have the option to

schedule alarm monitoring on the Schedule Tab of this form. If this option is NOT selected

but a schedule is in place, the schedule will monitor alarms only for the time that monitoring

is on. (Although the option to monitor is displayed for the 11^thDI on a Micro/PX-2000 (low-

battery alarm), an alarm is not generated for Cut and Short.)

ꢀ

•

An operator can see alarms on the Alarm Monitor Form only for facilities that are currently

active and assigned to the current operator.

The option to monitor an alarm must be selected on the Alarm Form in order for a specific

alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Alarms do not display on the Alarm Monitor Form if the selection to monitor an alarm is

removed, even though Alarm Routing and Bumping may be configured.

Always monitor (Short, Cut, Reset): If selected, this alarm will always display Cut, Short, and

Reset conditions of alarms on the Alarm Monitor Form. Select this option if a schedule

prevents monitoring an alarm/reset condition during certain periods of the day but you still

want Short, Cut, and Reset to be monitored and displayed. (Although the option to monitor is

displayed for the 11^thDI on a Micro/PX-2000 (low-battery alarm), an alarm is not generated

for Cut and Short.)

•

Micro dial host: If selected, an alarm occurring on a dial-up micro, or micros downstream

from a dial-up micro, will cause the micro to dial the host in order to report the alarm.

Operator acknowledge: If selected, the operator must acknowledge the alarm on the Alarm

Monitor Form before the alarm can be cleared.

Priority: Select a number from 0 to 9 by clicking on the up and down arrow buttons to the

right of the field. This number indicates the priority of this alarm and tells the system (host) in

which order it should alert the operator should multiple alarms occur at the same time. The

lower the number, the higher the priority; therefore, 0 has the highest priority and 9 the

lowest.

Route alarms to history: If selected, alarm activity is written to the alarm history.

Print alarms: If selected, the alarm history transaction is printed on a selected system parallel/serial

printer when the alarm changes state between alarm and reset. Alarm transactions will print only if the

transaction is routed to the printer and the alarm transaction printer is selected. The selection of the alarm

transaction printer is done on the Client tab of the Client form.

If you modified this record, save before you exit the form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

101

Alarms Tab - Alarm Routing and Bumping Form

Element

Alarms:

Description

This windowpane displays the names of Alarms assigned to

this Routing and Bumping record.

Assign Alarms:

Click to display an Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows

you to assign Secure Perfect alarms to this Routing and

Bumping record.

Alarms Tab

Reference Topic:

Enable Alarm Video Pop-Up

Event Trigger Form

This tab allows you to select alarm(s) and alarm transaction type(s) that will become the source for this

Event Trigger.

Element

Description

Transactions

Select one or both options as types of alarm transactions

to trigger an event. The alarm must be set for monitoring.

Alarm: An event is triggered as a result of an alarm.

Reset: An event is triggered as a result of an alarm reset.

Select one of the Tag Selection options:

Tag Selection

None: No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded

video or manipulating record rate.

Tag only: A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded

video at the camera(s) current record rate.

Tag as event: A tag is sent to the DVR for marking

recorded video and for changing the camera(s) record rate

to its event record rate settings.

Assign Alarms

Auto Pop-up

Click to display an Alarm Assignment window, enabling

you to select and assign/unassign an alarm record for this

Event Trigger record. You can also unassign an alarm for

an Event Trigger.

Select this checkbox to enable an automatic live video

pop-up window when an alarm occurs associated with this

alarm trigger. Additionally, the Enable Alarm Video Popup

must be enabled on the Operations menu. If this operators’

Permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available,

this option will not activate even though selected here.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

102

Antipassback

Set the antipassback status to neutral for all badges in this micro.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Antipassback Definitions

Antipassback (APB) is an access control feature designed and configured to reduce the chance of users

‘passing back’ their credential to another person attempting to gain access. When readers are designated

as entry (IN) or exit (OUT), the system is able to record whether a user in inside or outside at any time by

noting the last place their credential was used. If the last time it was used was at an IN reader, then the

system knows that they are inside. If the last time it was used was at an OUT reader, then the system

knows that they are outside.

•

Active APB does not let a person re-enter unless they first exit. The user is unable to ‘pass back’ their

credential to allow a friend to gain entry.

Passive APB records the status but does not enforce the status. The system knows where a person is

but does not stop them from entering twice. This type of system is often applied with time and

attendance.

•

Tailgating refers to a user following another user through a door without presenting a credential. They

follow closely enough so they can get through the door or gate before it closes. Only the first user is

recorded as IN or OUT.

Timed APB refers to a system where users are ‘forgiven’ after a certain length of time, configured in

minutes. After the configured time is expired, the user status is set to ‘neutral’ and the system allows

them to re-enter. This eliminates the need for an OUT reader and prevents a badge holder from re-

entering for that time period.

•

Global APB tracks the user throughout the entire Secure Perfect network and across all micros. No

matter where a user is, their APB status is recorded.

Regional APB (Secure Perfect Global Edition Systems) tracks the user within a Region. The user is

active in that Region only and inactive in all other Regions.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

103

APB Region Configuration Tab - Region Form

Use this tab to identify APB IN and APB OUT readers, and configure the APB behavior across Regions.

APB Entering Region: This listbox displays those readers that have been selected as APB IN readers

for the selected Region.

Assign : Click to assign APB IN readers to this region. Only readers previously configured as APB IN

readers are displayed for selection.

APB Exiting Region: This listbox displays those readers that have been selected as APB OUT readers

for the selected Region.

Assign : Click to assign APB OUT readers for this region. Only readers previously configured as APB

OUT readers are displayed for selection.

It may not be required or significant for the micros in a Region to report status to another Region. Select

from one of the following notification options:

1. Retain APB Status Across Regions: This is the default of three status options. If selected, the APB

status is recognized across all Regions in the Secure Perfect Global system. A badge can be

presented at an APB IN reader in one Region and at an APB OUT reader in a second Region. (Enable

Global APB must be selected on the Parameter Form.)

2. Invalidate Badge Across Regions: If selected, this option disables the badge in all other regions

when a person enters the selected Region by presenting the badge at an APB IN reader. The Activity

Monitor displays ‘Invalid APB IN’ or ‘Invalid APB OUT’ if you attempt to enter in or out of any other

Region. When a person exits the selected Region and the badge is presented at an APB OUT reader,

the badge becomes enabled in all other Regions. (Enable Global APB must be selected on the

Parameter Form.)

Example: Employees badging IN at a Miami office are tracked and not allowed to badge IN to another

location until they have presented their badge at an APB OUT reader in Miami.

3. Ignore APB Status Across Regions: If selected, the APB status is local to the selected Region and

status is retained within the Region. Regions are independent of each other and the status is not

recognzed by another Region.

API Connections

Reference Topic:

Appending Archive Databases

Administration Menu

This option opens the API Connections form that allows you to define an interface license for external

application integration by assigning a description of the API (Application Program Interface), and then

assigning an application login, password, and host computer.

This option is unavailable if you are not licensed for an API connection.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

104

Appending Archive Databases

If you have a backup of a SecurePerfectArchive3.x or later database, the data can be restored

using the SP Maintenance Utility. Backup and Restore functions are detailed in the Secure Perfect

Installation Guide.

The SP Maintenance Utility will also append badge history, alarm history, operator history, and where

appropriate, Digital Input history, Zone history, and DVR history data to the current

SecurePerfectArchivedatabase. Current SecurePerfectArchivedata will not be affected.

In order to use the Append utility, you must meet the following criteria:

•

Backup SecurePerfectArchivefiles must be restored to a local or mapped network

directory folder.

•

Free disk space that equals at least three times the size of your database backup file.

The ‘sa’ password.

Sufficient time and patience to complete the procedure.

To append data:

1. Open the SP Maintenance Utility and select Append from the menu bar.

2. Navigate to the Drive on the local computer where the backup file is located.

3. Select the Folder in which the backup file is located.

4. Select SecurePerfectArchive from the Backup Source File list.

5. Drag and drop the backup SecurePerfectArchive file to the Secure Perfect Archive Databases

Only: dialog box.

6. Enter the ‘sa’ password.

7. Click Append.

8. The Append process can take a considerable amount of time, depending on the size of the backup.

During the Append process, the application looks like it is not responding. This is normal.

9. When you have finished using the data, we recommend that you delete the appended data using

the Secure Perfect Parameter Form, Clear Archive tab. This will keep the current

SecurePerfectArchive file from becoming too large in size.

Archiving

Reference Topic:

Backing Up Data

An archive is a history of transactions. The archive is created automatically by Secure Perfect, based on

the time interval that you selected on the Parameters Form (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly). When you select

Weekly, you must also select a day of the week.)

If you select:

•

Daily: The archive is appended every day beginning at 11:59:58 P.M.

Weekly: The archive is appended every week on the day that you select, beginning at

11:59:58 P.M. (You must select a day of the week.) Any change in the scheduling occurs

immediately. For example, if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is

revised to archive on Wednesday, the archiving will occur one day later, on Wednesday.

Monthly: The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11:59:58 P.M.

•

The Secure Perfect services do NOT have to be running. Archiving will occur as long as SQL Server

Agent services are running. Archiving process takes place independently of Secure Perfect. As long as

the SQL Server Agent services are running, the archive process will occur.

Determine the status of the SQL Server Agent service by navigating to Settings, Control Panel, then

Component Services through Windows Explorer. Check the Status of SQLAgent$SPSQL.

Archiving is performed on the database Server computer only.

Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions and then removes all the data from the history

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

105

database. The data will be appended to the archive database until you decide the archive database has

grown too large.

The factors in determining whether the archive database is too large can be:

•

The size of your hard drive.

The performance you receive when running history reports.

The length of time you need to keep data.

Other factors specifically related to your installation.

To remove data from the archive database:

1. BACK UP YOUR SECURE PERFECT ARCHIVE DATABASE! You will have to back up the Secure

Perfect Archive database using utilities provided by SQL Server 2000 or by using the Secure

Perfect Maintenance Utility. After you perform the backup, label and store the media in a safe

place.

If you do not back up the SecurePerfectArchive, you will lose all the data stored in it.

2. Select the Administration menu, then Parameters.The Parameter Form opens with the Settings

tab displayed.

3. Select the Clear Archive tab. The Earliest Date in Archive DB and Latest Date in Archive DB

fields will indicate dates once you have clicked the Show Date button. If you do not have any

records in your archive database, the two date fields will state No Record.

4. Choose the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your archive database by

selecting the month, then the day to begin your archive.

5. Choose the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your archive database by selecting

the month, then the day to end your archive.

6. Click Delete.

7. Click OK.

The deletion of an archive database is taking place in the background. Progress is indicated on

the status bar in the lower right side of the screen. The process may take hours to complete. The

length of time is dependent on the size of the archive database and the hardware components of

your computer.

8. Upon completion, a message displays: The records from the Archive database has been

successfully deleted! Click OK.

Arm/Disarm an Intrusion Zone

Arm/Disarm an Intrusion Zone Using Access Rights

Any card and keypad reader or keypad within a defined zone can be used to arm and disarm the zone

with a valid access right for the reader and an Intrusion Zone assigned.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Arm = * 1 # followed by a valid card read.

•

If all alarm points are reset (not in an active state of alarm) and all doors closed, then all

readers are placed offline (doors locked) and alarm points are monitored on. The

corresponding Digital Output is fired as selected on the Intrusion Zone Form.

When the zone is successfully armed, all readers in the zone provide visual indication that

the zone is armed.

•

We recommend using CASI brand readers, configured to display the PIN light ON or

flashing, depending on the selected reader model. A Zone armed transaction is generated

and displays on the Activity Monitor Form.

•

When a zone is not successfully armed due to an invalid zone configuration on the Access

Right Form, an Arm/Disarm Failed, Invalid Access Right transaction is generated.

If any alarm points are set (in an active state of alarm) or a door is open, the zone does not

become armed. An Arm/disarm Failed Zone not secure transaction is generated and

displayed on the Activity Monitor Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

106

Disarm = * 0 # followed by a valid card read.

•

All alarm points in the zone are monitored off and readers in the zone are placed online for

normal operation.

We recommend using CASI brand readers, configured to display the PIN light switching

from ON or flashing to OFF, depending on the selected reader model. A Zone disarmed

transaction is generated and displays on the Activity Monitor Form.

•

When a zone is not successfully disarmed due to an invalid badge, an Arm/disarm Failed,

Invalid Access Right transaction is generated.

When a zone is disarmed, all normal access control rules apply for gaining access.

Arm/Disarm an Intrusion Zone Using Arm/Disarm Intrusion DI

All of the same rules apply as if arming or disarming using an access right.

•

When the zone is successfully armed, all readers in the zone should provide visual indication

that the zone is armed and a Zone Armed transaction is generated on the Activity Monitor

Form.

•

When a zone is not successfully armed, an Arm/disarm Failed transaction is generated.

When a zone is disarmed, all normal access control rules apply for gaining access and a

Zone Disarmed transaction is generated.

Arrange Icons

Windows Menu

This option allows you to control multiple windows or forms. If you have several forms in progress, you

can temporarily minimize a form from view. Select this option to arrange the minimized form icons across

the bottom of your Secure Perfect display screen.

Assign Micro Phone Numbers Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select a micro from the Dial-Up Micro drop-down list and assign telephone

numbers used by this micro to reach the selected backup client.

•

Click to display a list of only Dial-Up and Network + Dial-Up micros for the client record

displayed.

•

When you select a micro from the drop-down list, the Phone numbers to reach backup client

xxxxxx fields become available for entry (where xxxxxx = name of selected client in the

Backup Clients list box ).

•

When you enter a number in the first field, the Save button becomes available.

All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits. If there is only one

telephone number for this micro to reach the backup client, repeat this number in all four

fields. (If you click Save after completing the first Number field, the system will automatically

complete all Number fields with a duplicate number.)

•

Click Save to save the list of telephone numbers. The micro will dial the number in Number 1:

and then try the others in numerical order until connection it made.

Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Repeat the process for each micro in the Dial-up Micro drop-down list.

Click Save to save this client record.

•

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

107

Auto Shutdown of Client Services

Services will automatically shut down when a client closes the Secure Perfect application and meets ALL

of the following criteria:

1. Does not host any micros or DVRs.

2. Does not have any API connections.

3. Is not a Thin Client.

4. Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own.

5. Is not a CCTV client.

6. Is not hosting a Guard Tour.

7. Client form Enable Auto Shutdown is selected.

The shutting down of a particular client computer designates that license capacity unused. Now, that

license is available for another computer that can now be designated a Secure Perfect client.

Auto Update

Administration Menu

The Auto Update option opens the SP Auto Update Configuration Form that allows you to configure your

Secure Perfect network computer for automatic notification and installation of the latest Quick Fixes and

Service Packs.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

108

Backing Up Data

Reference Topics:

Archiving

Restoring Secure Perfect Databases

A backup is a copy of selected data. Since Secure Perfect does not contain a backup option, you can use

any method you like to back up the data. Because the Server computer contains the database, there is

no need to back up your Secure Perfect folder on your client computers.

You should keep two sets of backups, of the following Server computer files:

Secure Perfect Data: The data includes the following:

•

Database: Contains configuration data such as badges and micros.

History: Contains current history including badge transactions and operator history.

Archive: Contains the latest copy of Secure Perfect history data.

Images: Backup needed if you have Imaging installed. Contains the picture files of badge

holders.

•

Signatures: Backup needed if you have Imaging installed. Contains the signature files of

badge holders.

Graphics: Backup needed if you are using Alarm Graphics. Contains the alarm graphics

maps.

The SP Server program MUST NOT BE RUNNING when you attempt a backup of images,

signatures, or graphics!

You should back up this data more often since it changes so frequently. While your internal policies may

dictate your backup requirements, we recommend that you create a backup at least every week.

Entire Secure Perfect Installation

•

The entire Secure Perfect folder should be backed up when you first set up the system and

have confirmed that it is working, and any time you upgrade. It is very important that you also

back up the registry settings. In most backup programs, you will be prompted to back up

these settings.

•

ALWAYS MAINTAIN A CURRENT BACKUP. Should you have any problems with your

system, you can always restore your backup.

SP Enterprise Edition Systems use SQL Server utilities to back up the Secure Perfect database,

Secure Perfect History, and Secure Perfect Archive.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Secure Perfect Professional Edition Systems use the Secure Perfect Maintenance Utility to back up

the Secure Perfect database, Secure Perfect History, and Secure Perfect Archive information (tables and

queries).

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

109

Backup Clients Assignment Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select and assign backup clients associated with the selected client. This

list includes only clients available for assignment by the current operator and defined as a client that does

not exceed the limit of micros and DVRs allowed. When you select a client from the list, you will note that

the client statement defines the total combined number of DVRs and micros of the default client and

backup client. (The total number of micros cannot exceed 64. The total number of DVRs cannot exceed

16.)

• Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available client.

• Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a client.

Click OK to display results in the Backup Clients list box.

Backup Clients Tab

Reference Topic:

Client Monitoring

Takeover and Recovery Timing

Client Form

This tab displays ONLY at client computers that are licensed for Client Redundancy. Use this tab to

configure your backup clients that would take over the devices in case of a failure at the default client

computer.

Backup Clients:

This list box displays those clients you have assigned to take over control of any nondirect micros and

DVRs in the event of a failure at the default client computer. The order in which the client names display,

determines which client is next in line to take over. The timing of the takeover is a variable. Backup

clients must be online (Secure Perfect services are running). In the event of a failover, the client entry

includes the client computer name, and then the total combined number of DVRs and micros of the

default client and backup client.

•

Move Up: Select and click to move this client up the list.

Move Down: Select and click to move this client down the list.

Assign: Click to display a Backup Clients Assignment dialog box, listing client computers

found on your Secure Perfect system. Those computers selected and assigned when you

close the dialog box, will display in the Backup Clients list box.

Database Connection Heartbeat

The Secure Perfect system validates communication with backup clients by pinging (sending continuous

broadcast messages). If there is a communication failure between the default client and the backup

client, the backup client looks for a Heartbeat (time stamp in the database) as an indication that the

default client is online and connected. a) If a Heartbeat exists, the default client is "alive" and the backup

client will not initiate takeover of the devices from the default client. b) If a Heartbeat does NOT exist, the

backup client initiates takeover of devices from the default client. The backup client will use the following

values:

•

Heartbeat (seconds): Select a computer from the Backup Clients list box and assign an

interval of seconds (the range is 10 to 180) between Heartbeat checks. The default number

is 60 seconds. This number can be reset at any time.

•

Heartbeat Retries: Select the number of times (the range is 1 to 3) this backup client checks

for a Heartbeat stamp in the database, before initiating takeover of devices from the default

client. The default number of retries is 2.

Assign Micro Phone #s

This button is only available after completing the following:

•

Backup clients have been assigned.

The currently displayed client is host to Dial-up and/or Network + Dial-up micros.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

110

In the event of a system failure, the micros associated with the failed client must have available telephone

numbers to reach the backup client. Click to display an Assign Micro Phone Numbers dialog box.

Redundancy

Display Redundancy Notification:

By default, this check box is checked. If licensed for Client Redundancy, this check box must be selected

to generate a notification message, that will display at all clients (based on facilities available to the

current operator), when:

•

A client failure occurs.

A device takeover succeeded.

A device takeover did not succeed. [Select Details button for explanation.]

(If the first-in-line backup client is not available, a second backup client will take over control

of devices and a notification message displays, updating you.)

Recovery of the default client and transfer of devices failed. [Select Details button for

explanation.]

•

Recovery succeeded.

If you clear this check box, you will not receive a notification message; however, indication of a take over

displays on the Client Monitor Form.

Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown: This check box is unchecked or clear by default. Select this

check box to trigger the takeover, by a specified backup client, of devices associated with a client during

a normal shut down.

If your system is not licensed and you are operating in demo mode, this option is not available for

selection.

Backup Region Assignment Dialog Box

A list displays, of available backup Regional Database Server computers.

•

Select one or more computer names from the available list and then click the right arrow to

assign.

•

Select one or more computer names from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to

unassign.

Click OK to accept the selections and close this window.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

111

Backup Regions Tab - Region Form

Reference Topic:

Backup Region Assignment Dialog Box

Global Editions systems can be configured for database redundancy, at the Regional level. A Regional

Database Server can assign another for backup in the event of a failure at the default Regional Database

Server.

Regional database redundancy and fileserver redundancy operate independently. One or the other, or

both can fail at the same time, whether they reside on the same server computer or are configured to

reside on separate computers. Secure Perfect initiates three tries to fail over to another fileserver. This

process is taking place in the background. After three tries with no success, an SPFileServer interface

attempts to locate an available fileserver. If all attempts fail, the interface generates an alarm.

If you select a failover Regional Server and want your clients to failover to the backup Server, you

must also select the Client Region Failover checkbox on the Client form, Client tab .

Element

Description

Backup Regions

This list box displays those Regional Database Server

computers that you have assigned to take over control in

the event of a failure at the default Regional Database

Server. The order in which the computer names display,

determines which Server is next in line to take over.

Move Up

Move Down

Assign

Select and click to move this Regional Server up the list.

Select and click to move this Regional Server down the list.

Click to display a Backup Region Assignment dialog box,

listing available Regional Database Servers found on your

Secure Perfect Global Edition system. Those computers

selected and assigned when you close the dialog box, will

display in the Backup Regions list.

Badge

Personnel Menu

The Badge option opens the Badge Form that allows you to define a badge in the system. The badge

can then be linked to a person record in the system. More than one badge can be assigned to a person.

Badge

Reports Menu

The Badge option opens the Badge Report Form that allows you to create a report on the badges in your

Secure Perfect system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

112

Badge Alias

Reference Topic:

Badge Alias Form

Personnel Menu

The Badge Alias option displays the Badge Alias Form that allows you to assign an alias number to the

physically encoded badge number (available only if an alias was assigned during installation).

Badge Alias Tab

Badge Alias Form

Use this tab to assign alias numbers to badge encoded numbers.

Encoded Number

Displays the badge’s encoded number.

Badge Alias

If you selected Manual aliasing during installation, enter the new number for the badge.

If you selected Automatic aliasing during installation, the number will be entered for you.

Find Badge

Click to display a Find Badge dialog box, select a reader, and present a badge at that reader. The record

is displayed that is associated with the badge presented.

Click Save.

• Alias badge numbers saved to the system are automatically preceded with a ‘1-‘

• If this is a Global Edition system, the badge alias number is preceded by the Region ID number that

uniquely identifies the Region. Therefore, the same alias number can be assigned across regions,

because the number is uniquely identified by the Region ID.

Badge Assignment Dialog Box

This window displays when you click Assign Tour Badges, enabling you to select and assign tour badges

to a tour.

•

Multiple badges can be assigned to a guard tour, but if a badge is assigned to a tour, the

same badge cannot be assigned to any other tours.

•

The same badge must be used to complete the entire tour.

When a badge is assigned to a guard tour, the badge is downloaded to all micros that have

reader type tour points for that guard tour.

•

If any reader is assigned as a tour point, at least one badge must be assigned to the tour.

If all tour points are DIs, you do not need to assign a badge to the tour.

Click OK to display the results in the Tour Badges windowpane.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

113

Badge Definition Tab

Badge Form

Use this tab to define a badge.

Element

Description

Assigned to

Select the name of the person to whom this badge is assigned. If this

badge is not yet assigned, select <UNASSIGNED>.

Refresh: Click to update the person list with the most up-to-date

information.

Click the Show me icon to view a

step-by-step animated demo.

Number

This number must be unique to Secure Perfect. It may be already

encoded into the card (if you are using a card) or you can assign a

number in this dialog box no more than 20 digits. This number will be

entered into a keypad reader when there is no card.

If you are using badge aliasing: The alias displays here as a read-only

number and cannot be changed. An alias number is assigned on the

Badge Alias Form . The encoded number will be entered into a keypad

reader.

Status

Only badges with the status of Active will be granted access through

readers.

•

Active: The badge has been assigned to a person and may gain

access. An Active badge can be re-assigned as a Guard Tour

badge.

•

Guard Tour: The badge has been assigned to a person and will be

used as a guard tour badge. A Guard Tour badge can be re-

assigned as an Active badge.

•

Issuable: The badge has not yet been assigned to a person.

Lost: The badge has been reported as lost.

Remake: This badge has been damaged.

Suspended: This badge was assigned to a person who no longer

works at the facility.

PIN Number

If this badge will be used with a badge-and-keypad reader, enter a

personal identification number here. This number will have to be entered

at the keypad in order to gain access with this badge.

This number must be four digits.

•

Select this option to enforce ‘Extend Unlock Time’ for this badge

record. If you assigned this badge to a person from the ‘Assigned to’

drop-down list, this person is now allowed extra time to gain access

to an entry or exit point in the Secure Perfect system. Time

limitations are configured on the Door Functions tab of the Reader

Form .

Follow Extend

Unlock Time

•

If this badge is being assigned to a person whose existing record

indicates that Extend Unlock Time is enforced, this checkbox will

display as already selected.

Example: An extended time limit beyond normal can be configured for

an employee who enters a motorized door by wheelchair.

Manual Control:

Reset APB and

T&A Status

Resets the APB or T&A status of the current badge to neutral.

Dates

Click Calendar to select a date:

Issue: The date the badge was assigned and issued to a person.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

114

Expiration: The first date on which the badge will no longer grant

access. A blank value means the badge never expires.

Return: The date the badge was returned.

Last Valid Access

Date: Date the last valid access was granted to the badge, as stored in

the Secure Perfect database.

Time: Time the last valid access was granted to the badge, as stored in

the Secure Perfect database.

Reader: Reader at which the last valid access was granted to the

badge, as stored in the Secure Perfect database.

Find Badge

Click to display a Find Badge dialog box, select a reader, and present a

badge at that reader. The record displays that is associated with the

badge presented.

Badge Design

Personnel Menu

The Badge Design option opens the Badge Design Form that allows you to create or format what will

print on your badge.

Badge Format

Administration Menu

The Badge Format option opens the Badge Format form that allows an operator to design, import, or

export custom badge formats into the micro. Custom magnetic stripe or Wiegand formats can be loaded

to your Secure Perfect system.

Badge Formats in 40-Bit and 55-Bit Wiegand Protocol

4002 - 40-Bit Wiegand Format

The 40 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 38 code bits. The first bit transmitted is the first

parity bit, P1; it is even parity calculated over the first 20 bits. The last bit transmitted is the second parity

bit, P2; it is odd parity calculated over the total 40 bits.

Code format:

F = Facility – 0 Digits

B = Badge Number (99.999.999.999 possible) 12 digits

This format was created to enable identical badge identification numbers to be produced in either

S-F/2F or Wiegand mode. These numbers are derived from the 40-bit binary code in the proximity

chip. The badge number is comprised of the 38 least significant bits. The most significant bit is set at

5502 - 55-Bit Wiegand Format

The 55 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 53 code bits. The first bit transmitted is the first

parity bit, P1; it is even parity calculated over the first 27 bits. The last bit transmitted is the second parity

bit, P2; it is odd parity calculated over the total 55 bits.

Code format:

F = Facility – 0 digits

B = Badge Number – 16 digits

P = Parity Bit

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

115

Badge Format Tab

Reference Topics:

Micro Flash and Micro Parameter Configuration

Badge Formats in 40-Bit and 55-Bit Wiegand Protocol

Badge Format Form

This tab allows you to identify the pattern of the data bits (mask) combination, in the badge numbers that

you will import or export to your micro and store in the Secure Perfect database.

Element

Description

Format Type

Select from two data masks.

•

Magnetic Stripe: The number is a mask embedded into a magnetic tape

strip and usually adhered to badges or credit cards.

•

Wiegand: A pulse-generating mask sensed by a pickup coil (the reader).

This is a complex system to manufacture and virtually impossible to

duplicate making it one of the most secure access control technologies.

The number is a mask of a digital 0 or 1.

Position

Indicates the location or position of the bit where your mouse pointer is

presently positioned, in the mask combination.

•

Magnetic Stripe:

N = Badge or facility/site bit

B = Start character (With few exceptions, the start character is ‘B’ the

majority of the time.)

Badge data layout

(B,F,P,0,1)

0 to 9, A, C, D, E. = Constant characters

= Space

•

Wiegand: The following characters are acceptable. Also refer to the

Legend group box:

B = Badge identification (BID) bit

F = Facility/site code bit

P = Parity bit (an extra bit added for error detection or integrity testing)

0 or 1 = Constant characters

E = Parity layout - Even

O = Parity layout - Odd

= Space

The following settings apply to Wiegand Format ONLY:

Parity layout 1 (E, O):

Parity layout 2 (E, O):

Parity layout 3 (E, O):

Parity layout 4 (E, O):

Indicates the first parity bit in the data mask. The entry must be an even (0) or

odd (a) parity bit.

Indicates the second parity bit in the data mask. The entry must be an even

(0) or odd (1) parity bit.

Indicates the third parity bit in the data mask. The entry must be an even (0)

or odd (1) parity bit.

Indicates the fourth parity bit in the data mask. The entry must be an even (0)

or odd (1) parity bit.

Number of facility

characters:

The number of facility code bits in the data mask.

Numbers of badge

characters:

The number of badge number (BID) bits in the data mask.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

116

The following applies to all formats:

Import format from file

This selection is enabled when you click New to add a new record. Click to

navigate to a network drive, CD, diskette, or a local drive of your computer

and import a Wiegand or magnetic stripe file.

(Example Wiegand File Name: *.wgd)

Export format to file

Comments:

Click to navigate to a network drive, CD, diskette, or local drive of your

computer and export a Wiegand or magnetric stripe file.

Enter text as an explanation or details of this procedure. The field accepts

256 characters.

Badge History

Reports Menu

The Badge History option opens the Badge History Report Form that allows you to create a report

based on the history of badge transactions in the system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

117

Calendar Dialog

Select the day, month, and year of badge issue, return, or expiration. Click OK to accept the selected

date and close the form. Click Cancel to close the Calendar form without making any changes. Click

None to clear the date currently in the field.

Camera

Device Menu

The Camera option displays the Camera Form that allows you to edit the parameters of the selected

camera record. Camera records are automatically created when a DVR is defined.

Camera Preset

Administration Menu

The Camera Preset option opens the Camera Preset Form that allows you to label a preset camera

position and assign a number to that preset.

Camera Preset Assignment Dialog

A list of available camera presets displays. These presets were previously defined on the Camera Preset

Form.

•

Select one or more presets from the available list and then click the right arrow to assign.

Select one or more presets from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to unassign.

Click OK to accept the selections and close this window.

Can I Customize the Toolbar?

No. The toolbar cannot be customized.

Cascade

Window Menu

The Cascade option allows you to control multiple windows or forms. If you have several forms open but

not visible, select this option for a cascading view of your forms with the active form taking precedence on

the display screen.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

118

CCTV Alarm

Administration Menu

The CCTV Alarm options opens the CCTV Alarm Form that allows you to link CCTV alarms to Secure

Perfect alarms so that Secure Perfect alarms trigger CCTV events and display on the Secure Perfect

Alarm Monitor Form.

This form is NOT used in the Kalatel Integrated Digital Video option. It is only applicable in the serial

CCTV interface.

CCTV Alarm Assignment

This dialog box allows you to select and assign CCTV alarms to Secure Perfect alarms. Only CCTV

alarms in the operator’s facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm.

CCTV Tab

Alarm Form

Select this tab to assign CCTV alarms to Secure Perfect alarms. The windowpane displays the CCTV

alarms already assigned to this alarm.

Add/Remove: Click to display the CCTV Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows you to add or remove

items from the list.

CCTV Tab

CCTV Alarm Form

Use this tab to set up a CCTV alarm.

CCTV Interface: Select the Interface from the drop-down list. If there is no interface listed, then it has not

been installed.

CCTV Alarm: Select the alarm number from the drop-down list. When you assign a number, an enable

and disable message is automatically generated.

•

Enable Message: An enable message is automatically generated when you select a number

in the CCTV Alarm field. You can edit these messages, but any changes to the CCTV alarm

number will overwrite the changes to this message.

•

Disable Message: A disable message is automatically generated when you select a number

in the CCTV Alarm field. You can edit these messages, but any changes to the CCTV alarm

number will overwrite the changes to this message.

Reset CCTV Alarm:

•

When the Secure Perfect alarm is cleared from the Alarm Monitor: Select this option if you

want the CCTV alarm to reset when the alarm is cleared from the Secure Perfect Alarm

Monitor.

•

When the Secure Perfect alarm Resets: Select this option if you want the CCTV alarm to

reset when the alarm is reset in SP.

Change Password

Operations Menu

The Change Password option opens the Change Password Dialog Box that allows you to change your

password.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

119

Change State

If the micro is currently online, this will change the state to offline. If the micro is offline, this will change

the state to online.

Each time a micro is set to online, the database must be downloaded to the micro. If a new micro

database is required, click Download Database as well as Download Badges for the selected micro.

Download Database:

Download Badges:

Check for Update

Reference Topic:

SP Auto Update Configuration Form

File Menu

This item is enabled when the Enable Auto Update option is selected on the SP Auto Update

Configuration Form of the Administration menu.

Each time you log in, your Secure Perfect system checks for updates. Also, at any time, you may select

this item to begin a search of the configured Web site for updates to the Secure Perfect system. This

process searches for new upgrades, compares the version, and if the patch or update needs to be

applied, a dialog box displays a message.

•

Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the update process.

Click Cancel to close the dialog box and process the upgrade at another time.

If the Web site cannot be reached, a message informs you that communication failed. Recheck your

update configuration settings and try again.

•

If no new updates are available for your system, a message displays informing you that your system is

up to date.

Clear Archive Tab

Reference Topic:

Archiving

Appending Archive Databases

Parameters Form

Earliest Date in Current Archive DB: If you have an archive database, this date displays when you click

Show Date.

Latest Date in Current Archive DB: If you have an archive database, this date displays when you click

Show Date.

Show Date: If you have an archive database, click Show Date.

•

The Earliest Date in Current Archive DB and Latest Date in Current Archive DB will display.

If you do not have an archive database, the two date fields will state No Record.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

120

Archive Clean Period:

•

Start Date: Select the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by

selecting the month, then the day to begin your archive.

End Date: Select the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by

selecting the month, then the day to end your archive.

Delete: Press after selecting Start Date and End Date to remove from your database.

The deletion of an archive database takes place in the background. Progress is indicated on the

status bar. This may take hours to complete and is dependent on the size of the Archive database and

the hardware components of your computer.

Clear Button

This option clears all badge transactions from the Activity Monitor Form.

Clicking this icon from the Activity Monitor Form toolbar will access this option:

Clear Search

Search Menu

The Clear Search option clears all data in the current form. Use this option when the form has data and

you want to begin a new search. The option does not conduct a search nor does it affect any data in the

database. It only clears data from the form in preparation for a search or to cancel a change to a record.

The Clear Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Client

Administration Menu

The Client option opens the Client Form that allows you to merge a client computer to your Secure

Perfect system.

Client Assignment Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select and assign Secure Perfect client computers to a Client Group. Only

clients in the operator’s facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available client.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a client.

Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Clients windowpane.

Client Group

Administration Menu Item

The Client Group option opens the Client Group form, allowing you to assign Secure Perfect client

computers into logical groups. A comment box is available for entry to describe the configuration. Later,

client groups can be assigned to specific alarm routing and bumping configurations.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

121

Client Group Tab - Client Group Form

On this tab, you must assign at least one Secure Perfect client computer in order to save this Client

Group record.

Element

Clients:

Description

This windowpane displays the names of client computers

that are assigned to this Client Group.

Assign Clients

Comments

Click to display a Client Assignment dialog box that allows

you to assign Secure Perfect clients to this Client Group.

Use this field to describe the reason for creating this group or

special considerations for this configuration. This field

accepts 256 characters.

Client Monitor

Operations Menu

The Client Monitor option opens the Client Monitor Form that allows you to obtain client information

such as client type, Imaging status, and connection status. The shortcut key combination for the Client

Monitor Form is CTRL+C.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

122

Client Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Reference Topics:

Client Monitor Form Toolbar

Client Form

Element

Description

To disconnect the selected client.

Disconnect

Launch

To launch and enable a CCTV interface (other than integrated CCTV).

To display the Client Form, to add a client to the Secure Perfect network.

Client Form

Recover

To initiate recovery of a host that failed, was taken over by a backup client ,

and is now able to host its original devices. When the default client is running,

a manual intervention is required to bring all its devices back to itself.

This option is enabled and available ONLY on the shortcut menu of the

default host that is now ready to be recovered.

- A notification message informs you of a successful recovery. Control of

devices is returned to the default host.

- A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery. Verify

communication with the default host and retry the recovery.

To initiate recovery of a Regional Database Server host that failed, was taken

over by a backup Regional Server , and is now able to host its database.

Recover Region

This option is enabled and available ONLY on the shortcut menu of the

default host that is now ready to be recovered.

- A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery.

To display the Manual Control form, for this operator to manually perform

operations on the system.

Manual Control Form

Client Monitor Form Toolbar

Reference Topics:

Client Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Click

Disconnect the selected client.

Enable a CCTV interface (other than integrated

CCTV).

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

123

Client Redundancy Overview

The Secure Perfect software system is responsible for processing alarm and badge transactions from

devices like micros and DVRs. The software is responsible for writing these transactions to the database.

A device such as a micro or DVR is hosted by a single Secure Perfect client. The client could potentially

be responsible for hundreds of devices and can be a single point of failure. Although devices like the

micro are designed to run without the host software running for days, eventually memory is going to be

filled up at the micro end. The redundancy feature in SP 6.0 is designed to address this condition. Clients

can be configured to be backed up by other clients so that, in case of the default hosting client (called the

primary client) being disabled, one of the backup clients takes over all its devices. This is designed to

work automatically without any operator intervention so the system continues to work efficiently. One of

the backup clients performs the role of the default client until the default client is back up and running.

The devices that can be taken over at present are all DVRs, network micros, dialup micros, and network

+ dial up micros. Direct micros cannot be hosted by any other than the default client computer.

The table below will assist you to find the areas in this Help system, relating to the redundancy feature.

Reference Topics:

Configuring Client Redundancy:

Am I Licensed for Client Redundancy?

How do I configure backup clients for redundancy?

What micros are supported?

Client Monitor Form Shortcut Menu

Backup Clients Tab

Backup Clients Tab , Assign Micro Phone #s

Backup Clients Tab

What are the limits on micros and DVRs?

What is not permitted?

Backup Clients Tab

When a Failover Occurs:

Backup Clients Tab, Display Redundancy

Messages Displayed

Notification

Client Monitoring , Active Client

Client Monitoring

Backup Clients Tab , Database Connection

How long should I wait when a failover occurs?

Heartbeat

What alarms display on the Alarm Monitor?

Alarm Tab

What is the behavior on the Digital Video Viewer

and Network List?

Digital Video Viewer

Recovery:

Backup Clients Tab , Display Redundancy

Recovery Notification

Messages

Notification

Client Monitoring

How do I recover?

Backup Clients Tab , Display Redundancy

Notification

What happens when a default client is back up?

What is the timing on the recovery?

Takeover and Recovery Timing

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

124

Client Tab

Client Form

Element

Description

•

When creating a new client record, click Browse to display a Select Client

window, listing all computers found on your network by PC name. (Secure

Perfect uses PC names only.) To add a client, select the computer name from

the list and click OK. You can add as many clients as you want but you are

limited to the number of licensed clients connected to the network at one time.

The number of client licenses presently active and connected to the Secure

Perfect system can be found on the Client Monitor form.

By default, when an existing client record displays, PC Name is read-only and

not available for edit

PC Name

•

Client computers to which devices are associated, cannot be deleted. The

devices must be removed or assigned to another client before this client can

be deleted.

•

Client computers assigned as backup clients cannot be deleted. You must first

un-assign this client from the Backup Clients list on the Backup Clients tab,

and then delete.

OS Type

Region

When adding a Secure Perfect client to your system, accept the default OS Type

as Windows. When conducting a search, select either Windows or CCTV from

the drop-down list.

This field is available only when you first open the Client form, and BEFORE you

initiate a Search. To locate a particular Server or client, you are able to select a

Server name from the Region drop-down list. The field default displays the

Database Server computer name. The clients associated with the selected

Region display in the right windowpane. (If you click Search immediately after

you open the Client form, this field displays the default Server name and is

unavailable for selection.)

•

Disabled: Select if you want to disable Imaging in order to enable another

client computer.

Imaging Status

•

Enabled: Select to enable Imaging here but you are limited to the number of

licensed Imaging stations enabled at one time. The number of Imaging

licenses presently active can be found on the Client Monitor form.

Thin Client

Status

A Secure Perfect client computer can also be a thin client. A thin client has

Terminal Services and/or Citrix Server software installed. If the Secure Perfect

client has Thin Client Status of Enabled, other computers can connect to the

Terminal or Citrix Server on the Secure Perfect client and run Secure Perfect.

•

Disabled: Select if you want to disable the thin client option.

Enabled: Select to enable the thin client option at this Secure Perfect client.

The number of thin clients you can enable is controlled by the number of thin

client licenses you have. Refer to the Client Monitor form, which displays the

number of thin client licenses presently available and in use.

Auto Logoff

Select the number of minutes the system will wait since the last action was taken

before logging off the current operator. To turn off the auto logoff feature and

remain permanently logged in, enter 0(zero). The default setting is 20 minutes.

You must restart the Secure Perfect client program for changes to the Auto

Logoff selection to take effect.

Display Alarm

Notification

Enable this field if you want an alarm dialog box to display whenever an alarm

occurs, based on facilities available to the current operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

125

Client Region

Failover

This checkbox displays only on a Global Editions system.

This checkbox is applicable to Secure Perfect Global Edition systems. When

displayed, the default state of this checkbox is selected and grayed out. If a

database failure occurs at the default Regional Database Server, this client would

automatically fail over to a configured backup Regional Database Server.

Backups are configured on the Region Form, Backup Regions tab .

Click the checkbox to clear and disable the automatic failover option. You might

choose to clear this checkbox to prevent nonessential client failover.

Enable Auto

Shutdown

Secure Perfect services will automatically shut down when a client closes the

Secure Perfect application and meets all the Auto Shutdown criteria.

•

Interval: This is the interval of time a broadcast message will be sent,

indicating a client is online. (Default is 40,000. This field will not accept an

entry less than 5,000 msec.)

Ping Time

(msec)

•

Timeout: The amount of time that will elapse between broadcast message and

response before the system considers a client offline. The client status will

display on the Client Monitor form. (Default is 120,000. This field will not

accept an entry less than three times the Interval amount specified.)

ACTIVITY PRINTING

CAUTION: Windows 2003 or Win/XP Professional Operating Systems: If the printer you have

selected is hosted by a computer running a Windows 2003 or Win/XP Professional operating system,

you must add permissions to share this printer to the Secure Perfect network. At the host computer,

navigate to your printer property settings. On the Security tab, add ANONYMOUS LOGON or

NETWORK to the Security permissions.

Printers can be connected to the Server or any client computers. The defaults of the activity printer

selections are cleared on any newly configured system. Any system with a newly converted database

will require reconfiguration of these activity printer selections at each client workstation.

Alarm and

Guard Tour DI

Activity Printing

You must enable, select a printer, and route alarms to a printer in order for

alarm activity to print.

•

Enable: Select this check box to print alarm activity. If you select to enable

alarm activity printing, you must select a printer in order to save this record.

Printer: Displays the currently selected printer to which alarm activity will

print. This may be the same or a different printer than that used for badge

transactions.

•

Select Printer: Click this button to select a printer to which alarm activity will

print.

Print Alarms At Host must be selected on the Alarm Form in order for alarm

activity to print.

Badge and Zone

Activity Printing

You must enable, select a printer, and route badge activity to a printer in order

to print badge transactions.

•

Enable: Select this check box to print badge activity. If you select to enable

badge and zone activity printing, you must select a printer in order to save

this record.

Printer: Displays the currently selected printer to which badge transactions

will print. This may be the same or a different printer than that used for alarm

activity.

Select Printer: Click to select a printer to which badge transactions will print.

1) Printer options must be selected on the Reader Form in order for badge

transactions to print. 2) All zone activity transactions print and do not follow

routing or schedules assigned to a reader.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

126

Comments Tab

Micro Form

This tab and windowpane are provided to enter information about this micro, such as location data.

Communication Settings Tab

Reference Topic:

Dial-Up Troubleshooting

Parameters Form

Use this tab to select the modems that will be used for dial-up micros.

Installed Modems: Displays all modems currently installed on the PC. To designate a modem for use

with a dial-up micro, enable it by clicking in the box to the left of the modem name so that a check

displays. If you have a modem installed for support use, DO NOT SELECT THAT MODEM.

Disconnect After Idle: Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait before disconnecting

from the micro when the connection is idle (there is no history or database information being exchanged).

If you select 0, the connection will remain active indefinitely and the host will never drop communication

with the micros.

Network Port Range:

•

If you communicate with your micros over a local intranet, this does not apply. Ignore these

remarks.

•

If you must cross a firewall to communicate with your micros, you will need to read the

following:

Low end:/High end: You will be required to open up a range of ports sufficient to support the number of

micros with which you must communicate outside a firewall. The first ten port addresses are reserved for

client-to-client communication. Anything beyond the first ten port addresses can be used for micro

communication.

Example Addresses:

Default Low end:

Default High end:

6700

6709

(These are the 10 internal port addresses reserved for client-to-client communication.)

Change High end: to: 6710

= Assign address to 1 micro outside the firewall.

= Assign addresses to 2 micros outside the firewall.

= Assign addresses to 3 micros outside the firewall.

6711

6712

Communications Settings Tab

Digital Video Recorder Form

Use this tab to assign or edit a TCP/IP address, PTZ control, event tagging, and clock time

synchronization.

TCP/IP Address

Assign or edit the TCP/IP network address for the DVR .

PTZ Control

Select TCP/IP or None. The default is None. TCP/IP is to be selected if cameras with PTZ capability are

configured on this DVR and require control from SP. None is to be selected if all cameras on this DVR

are either fixed or if no control of PTZ cameras is desired.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

127

Event Tagging

Select TCP/IP or None. The default is None. Select TCP/IP if event triggers are required to tag recorded

video upon activity from defined readers and alarms. Select None if no tagging of recorded video is

required for event triggers and only access to live video is desired upon activity from defined readers and

alarms.

Time Sync Interval

The DVR date and time clock can be syncronized by its host computer to ensure that access control,

alarm, and video events across the entire system are time stamped in sync. When DVRs on a centralized

system reside in different time zones, the DVRs should be hosted by computers in their same time zone.

The Secure Perfect hosting computers will synchronize their DVR clocks at the interval selected as well

as immediately manage any system date and time changes including daylight savings time. Select one:

•

None (default)

1 Hour

4 Hours

8 Hours

12 Hours

24 Hours

If DVRs are required to be synchronized with the Secure Perfect system date and time clock, 12 Hours is

a recommended setting for most systems.

Conditions of Mass Update

The time to process a mass update depends on your system performance, number, and type of

updates. Specifically, the badge learn and alarm processing functions may be influenced. We

recommend that you schedule mass update processing during off-peak hours for your company.

•

GE Security has set 200 as the default maximum number of records that can process

updates at one time. However, this number is configurable. Call GE Security Customer

Support for assistance if you want to reconfigure the default.

ONLY those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are enabled in

Mass Update mode.

•

Navigating from any form to another form in Mass Update mode will take that form out of

Mass Update mode.

Person Form:

The following fields are available for mass update: Facility, Personnel Type, Department, and

Access Rights.

•

Badge Form:

•

The following fields are available for mass update: Assign To, Status, Dates – Issue, Dates –

Expiration, and Dates – Return.

When changing an assigned badge to unassigned, the status automatically changes to

Issuable.

When changing status to Issuable, a message displays a Yes or No option. If Yes, the status

automatically changes to Issuable and selected badges are unassigned.

When changing an unassigned badge (status is Issuable) to an assigned person, the status

changes to Active.

Records selected for mass update with a status changing to anything other than Issuable will

cause a check for badge assignment.

If any badge in the mass update selection is not currently assigned, these badge records

become unavailable and a message displays indicating they are unavailable.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

128

Create Default Template

File Menu

Select this option to create a default Report template. This option is available only when a Report Form is

displaying.

If a specific date is part of this template, whenever this report is run, it will use that date; therefore, it is

important to update the calendar criteria as needed.

Creating a Dial-Up Micro Record

Reference Topic:

Records Generation

Set up your modem(s) through the Server or client computer’s operating system. Refer to the

documentation you received with your modem.

1. Select the Administration menu, then select Parameters.

2. Select the Communication Settings tab, and enable the modem(s) that will be used for micros. You

will need to stop the SP Server computer and then restart it.

3. Once you restart Secure Perfect and log in, select the Device menu, then Micro.

4. On the Micro Definition tab, default values will be filled in for the following fields: Head of line and

Badge Loading.

ꢀ

Enter the address of the micro.

Enter the type of micro.

If this micro is the first micro on a string of micros, select Yes under Head of line. Otherwise,

select No and select the head of line micro. If this is a downstream micro that you are adding,

the micro directly upstream (towards the host) from it will need to be reset in order for it to

recognize the micro you are adding.

Example:

If your line of micros looks like this:

Host – Micro 1 – Micro 2

And you want to add Micro 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this:

Host – Micro 1 – Micro 2 – Micro 3

Then you would need to reset Micro 2 in order for Micro 3 to be recognized.

For Connection type, select Dial-up.

Select a Badge Loading method.

ꢀ

5. On the Password tab, if you do not enter passwords, the default passwords (one-1, two-2, three-3,

and four-4) are used. If you want to change the passwords, you may do so at any time.

6. On the Time Zone tab, verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary.

7. On the Comments tab, you may enter any information you want or leave this tab blank.

8. On the Events tab, you may want to schedule when APB and T&A are reset and when the host

dials the micro. If you select an event for the Dial field (host dials the micro), you must stop and

restart the SP Server before the host will recognize the event settings.

9. Select the Status tab to view information about the micro such as the firmware version. You can

request the latest information by clicking Refresh.

10. On the Settings to Reach Host tab:

ꢀ

Enter the telephone number(s) that the micro will dial to reach the host.

Enter the interval at which the micro will automatically dial the host.

Enter the number of times the micro will try the same number.

Enter the number of intervals that the micro will wait before trying a telephone number again.

11. On the Settings to Reach Micro tab:

ꢀ

Enter the telephone number(s) that the host will dial to reach the micro.

Enter the interval at which the host will automatically dial the micro.

Enter the number of times the host will try the same number.

Enter the number of intervals that the host will wait before trying a telephone number again.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

129

12. On the Micro Configuration tab, select the boards that are in the micro you are setting up. Click the

desired board in the Boards and drag to the Configuration column. To delete a board from the

Configuration column, select then right-click and select Delete.

13. Click Save to save the record. If there is any required information missing, a message will display

listing those items that are incorrect or missing. Do not forget to save the record again once you fix

those items.

14. When the micro record is created, the records for the associated readers, alarms, alarm groups,

digital outputs, and digital output groups are also created with default data based on the boards you

added on the Micro Configuration tab.

15. Use the Micro Utilities Form to set the micro online.

Creating a Direct-Connect Micro Record

Reference Topic:

Records Generation

1. On the Micro Definition tab of the Micro Form, default values will be filled in for Head of line and

Badge Loading. Complete the following:

ꢀ

Enter the address of the micro.

Enter the type of micro.

If this micro is the first micro on a string of micros, select Yes under Head of line. Otherwise,

select No and select the head of line micro. If this is a downstream micro that you are adding,

the micro directly upstream (towards the host) from it will need to be reset in order for it to

recognize the micro you are adding.

Example:

If your line of micros looks like this:

Host – Micro 1 – Micro 2

And you want to add Micro 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this:

Host – Micro 1 – Micro 2 – Micro 3

Then you would need to reset Micro 2 in order for Micro 3 to be recognized.

For connection type, select Direct.

Set Host keep alive time interval.

Enter the PC name of the host computer or navigate and select.

Select a method.

ꢀ

2. On the Password tab, if you do not enter passwords, the default passwords (one-1, two-2, three-3,

and four-4) are used. If you want to change the passwords, you can do so at any time.

3. On the Time Zone tab, a default time zone is filled in. Verify and adjust time zone settings as

necessary.

4. On the Comments tab, enter any information you want or leave blank.

5. On the Events tab, you may want to schedule when APB and T&A are reset.

6. Select the Status tab to view information about the micro such as the firmware version. You can

request the latest information by clicking Refresh.

7. On the Micro Configuration tab, select the boards that are in the micro you are setting up. Click the

board you want and drag to the Configuration column.

8. To delete, select a board from the Configuration column, right-click and select Delete.

9. Click Save. If there is any required information missing, a window will display listing those items

that are incorrect or missing. Don’t forget to save the record again once you fix those items.

10. When the micro record is created, the records for the associated readers, alarms, alarm groups,

digital outputs, and digital output groups are also created with default data based on the boards you

added on the Micro Configuration tab.

11. Use the Micro Utility Form to set the micro online.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

130

Database Tab - Reports

Alarm History, Badge History, Zone History, DI History, Time and Attendance, or Operator History

Reports

Use this tab to select the history database to use for this report. The file name displayed on the tab is the

currently selected archive database.

•

Select archive database: Click to select the archive history database.

Use default: Click to use the current history database.

Database Utilites

The Integrity utility runs automatically, following a database creation or conversion and upgrade from a

previous version of Secure Perfect. No user interaction is required.

The utility can be run manually if you want to check your database integrity. The system compares and

validates the integrity of your database schema. If selected, the system will automatically correct missing

or incorrect schema properties such as columns, keys, constraints, indexes, triggers, and tables. The

executable file is installed with Secure Perfect and resides in the Secure Perfectprogram folder.

1. Locate and double-click the DatabaseIntegrity.exefile to manually run the utility.

2. Enter the Server Name or click the browse button and navigate to the appropriate Server Name.

3. Enter the SQL system administrator ‘sa’ Database Password or accept the encrypted database

password of the default Server.

4. Click Connect to locate and connect to the Secure Perfect databases. The remaining selections are

now enabled. Accept the default options or review and disable selections.

5. Select one of two options:

ꢀ

Verify that Check Database Integrity is selected.

OPTIONAL: Select the Autocorrect checkbox. This feature runs only once and

corrects obvious schema in the database. Results display in a report.

Autocorrect is not available on a Global Edition system.

Select which databases to check.

Select Start to begin. Wait as the Database Integrity tool compares and validates the

integrity of your database. Messages generate to an IntegrityCheck.htmlfile in

your Secure Perfect application Logs folder.

ꢀ

Select Unlock Database Mutex to unlock the shared resource. Select Unlock to

unlock the database mutex for SPSQL.

6. Click OK when the Application Success window displays.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

131

7. Click View Integrity Report to review the messages generated to an IntegrityCheck.html file in your

Secure Perfect application Logs folder. Review the file to determine if database errors were detected.

Click Close to close the window and exit.

The Replication tab is applicable to systems that have Secure Perfect Global Edition installed. We

recommend that you call GE Security Customer Support for assistance in setting the parameters for the

Global Edition database replication.

Date Range Tab - Reports

Roll Call, Alarm History, Badge History, Zone History, DI History, Time and Attendance History, or

Operator History Reports

Use this tab to select a date and time range on which to base this report.

•

Daily time range: Will report on transactions that occurred between the start and stop time

each day in the date range. For example, you select a start time of 8:00 a.m., a stop time of

5:00 p.m., a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5. You will receive a report of badge

transactions occurring between 8:00 a.m. through 5:00 p.m. each day of the day range.

Continuous time span: Continuous will report on transactions that occurred between the start

time on the start day to the stop time on the stop day. For example, you select a start time of

8:00 a.m., a stop time of 5:00 p.m., a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5. You will

receive a report of alarm transactions occurring between 8:00 a.m. on April 1 through 5:00

p.m. on April 5.

•

Start Date: Select the start date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar. To move

ahead or back by a month, click the arrows on either side of the name of the month. To move

ahead or back by a year, click the arrows on either side of the year.

•

Start Time: Accept the default start time as displayed or enter a start time.

Stop Date: Enter an end date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar. To move

ahead or back by a month, click the arrows on either side of the name of the month. To move

ahead or back by a year, click the arrows on either side of the year.

•

Stop Time: Accept the default stop time as displayed or enter a stop time.

Definition Tab - Alarm Routing and Bumping Form

This tab allows you to configure the routing of alarms to selected Client Groups according to a schedule

or at all times. Additionally, you can select Client Groups and set a time to bump the alarm to an

additional location.

•

You can configure both Routing and Bumping, only a Routing record, or only a Bumping

record.

•

Client Groups can be part of any Region in a Secure Perfect Global Edition system.

Element

Description

ROUTING:

Client Groups

This windowpane displays the names of Client Groups

assigned to this Routing record.

Assign Client Groups

Click to display an Alarm Routing Client Group Assignment

dialog box that allows you to assign Secure Perfect Client

Groups to this Routing record.

Select one of the following options:

•

Always

Select this option if you always want this Client Group to

receive alarms.

•

Time Schedule

Select this option to enable the Time Schedule drop-down list

and then select a Time Schedule from the list.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

132

BUMPING:

Client Groups

This windowpane displays the names of Client Groups

assigned to this Bumping record. Typically, the Client Groups

displayed here are different than those assigned to Routing.

Assign Client Groups

Click to display an Alarm Bumping Client Group Assignment

dialog box that allows you to assign Secure Perfect Client

Groups to the Bumping record.

Time To Bump:

•

Minutes

•

Select the number of minutes to wait before bumping this

alarm notification to an additional location, if the alarm is not

acknowledged or purged at the Routing work station. The

Alarm Monitor form will indicate that this alarm is bumped.

The minimum setting is one minute. The default and

maximum is 30 minutes.

•

Seconds

•

Select the number of seconds to wait before bumping this

alarm notification to an additional location. The default is

zero.

Use this field to describe the reason for creating this record

or special considerations for this configuration. This field

accepts 256 characters. It is not necessary to complete an

entry in this field.

Comments

Definition Tab - API Connections Form

Enter information that defines an interface license for external application integration to Secure Perfect.

Application Login: Enter the login used by the external application to connect and access the API. Each

Password: We recommend a noncryptic password. The password must be greater than four

alphanumeric or wildcard characters, with no spaces. The password is NOT case sensitive.

Confirm Password: Enter the password a second time.

PC Name: From the drop-down list, select the Secure Perfect computer that will host the external

application.

Definition Tab - Camera Form

This tab displays the camera channel address, with which DVR this camera is associated, and camera

type configurable for Fixed or PTZ. The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing

from within SP. Use this form to edit the parameters of the selected camera record.

Address

This is a read-only field. The address of the camera is automatically assigned. The address is a 2-digit

number that corresponds to the camera channel on the back of the DVR.

DVMR

This is a read-only field. This field displays the corresponding DVR with which this camera is associated.

Camera Type

Select a type of camera behavior as Fixed or PTZ from the drop-down list.

Enable Camera

By default, this checkbox is selected. The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing

from within Secure Perfect and setting accessibility from the Digital Video Viewer. Disabled cameras will

not display on the Digital Video Viewer.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

133

Definition Tab - Camera Preset Form

Preset

In this text field, enter a number within the range of 1 to 32. This number will only reference the preset

number programmed and stored in a camera with PTZ capability. Click Save. This preset is now

available for assignment, to a specific camera.

Definition Tab - Digital Video Recorder Form

Use this tab to assign or edit a bus address, type, host computer, or poll time.

Field

Description

DVR

Address

Enter a DVR Address, a unique Secure Perfect logical address

associated with this DVR (from 1 to 255). This field will not be

available to edit existing records. This number is used in Secure

Perfect software to uniquely identify the DVR and its related

records.

DVR Type

Select a DVR type from the drop-down list. Secure Perfect currently

supports: 4, 10, and 16-camera channel multiplexer/recorder

models from Kalatel. This field will not be available for edit on

existing records. When you click Save, the number of camera

records will be created equivalent to the type of DVR you selected.

Bus

Address

The bus address is a 2-digit field in the range of 1 to 32. The bus

address refers to the physical DVR device address on the RS-485

bus and must be entered when multiple DVRs exist on a single bus

and/or for controlling camera(s) with PTZ capability.

Host

Select a Default Hostname from the drop-down list that will host

Computer

the defined DVR and act as its communications server.

If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition, you

cannot re-assign this DVR to any other Host computer except the

Active Client that is presently hosting this device.

• Enter Poll Interval as the length of time in seconds that will

elapse prior to a staus request being sent to the DVR for

verification of communications and processing of error and/or

alarm messages since the last poll.

Poll Time

(seconds)

• Enter Timeout as a length of time to wait for a response after a

request prior to retrying (if no response has been returned).

• Enter Retry Interval as the length of time to wait between

retries.

• Enter Retry Count as the number of retries to attempt before

qualifying a communications failure.

Delete Record

File Menu Item

The Delete Record option deletes the current record from the database. BE CAREFUL when selecting

this option, as deleted records cannot be recovered! The Delete Record option is available only when a

form is open, contains records, and you have been given all permissions.

Some forms such as the Reader Form do not have a delete option.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

134

Delete Template

File Menu

Select this option to delete the current Report template. This option is available only when a Report Form

is displaying with a loaded template.

<deleted> Displays After I Delete All the Records

To correct this, click Clear, and then click Add.

Department

Personnel Menu

The Department option opens the Department form that allows you to create departments that can then

be assigned to person records.

Department Tab

Department Form

Click Search to display or modify a list of existing departments. Click Add to create additional department

records of your own, based on your company.

DES/DES III Data Encryption Standards

Data Encryption is additional security assigned to protect the Host-to-micro exchange of information. The

data messages are encrypted.

Methods of Encryption

•

DES: This option uses a single pass of authentication and 16 unique hex characters are

required.

•

DES III: This method of encryption uses a three-pass authentication process. Starting at the

left, the first pass authenticates 16 hex characters. The second pass authenticates 16 hex

characters. The third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

135

Design Tab

Badge Design Form

Use this tab to create a new badge design record. If you are editing an existing design, these options are

not available.

Select one of the following:

•

Select Default Layout: Select a badge default layout as Portrait or Landscape.

Select Import Layout: Select Import Layout to make available the option to Browse to the Secure

Perfect designs folder and import an existing design. If you have already chosen a default layout,

this option is unavailable.

•

Click Save to enable the Edit Badge Design button.

Edit Badge Design: Click to open the badge designer program that allows you to draw the graphics that

comprise the badge design. If you had a previous version of badge designer that created files with a

.gdrextension, you will be prompted to save the file as a .dgnwhen you edit a badge design for the

first time. Access the extensive Online Help system from the Badge Designer toolbar. Additionally, refer

to the Badge Designer User Manual, and review the "What’s New" section. A PDF file of the manual is

provided on your documentation CD.

•

Each workstation where badge design or badge printing is to be performed must have its own

license. Refer to your Secure Perfect Installation Guide for additional details.

If Imaging Status is not enabled for this client workstation, this feature is unavailable.

Device Configuration

Reports Menu

The Device Configuration option opens the Device Report Form that allows you to create a report on

devices such as micros, readers, alarms, alarm groups, digital outputs, digital output groups, digital

inputs, DVRs, cameras, and elevators.

Device Menu Selections

The following selections display in the Device drop-down menu:

Digital Video Recorder

Camera

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

136

Diagnostic Setting

Administration Menu

The Diagnostic Setting option opens the Diagnostic Setting Form that allows you to select items for

which diagnostic information will be recorded in the diagnostics log, as created on the LogFile Form. This

is a good place to start troubleshooting.

Diagnostic Viewer

Administration Menu

The Diagnostic Viewer option opens the DiagView program. The items you selected on the Diagnostic

Setting Form determine the debug messages displayed by the DiagView program.

The DiagView program has its own Help system for additional details.

Diagnostic Viewer

When you select Diagnostic Viewer on the Administration menu, the DiagView program opens. The

activities of your selected component are displayed. (Those items with the COM # and Line # as part of

the component name have the highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage.)

The DiagView Help system provides additional details of the program.

Dial-Up/Hangup

If the dial-up micro is currently connected, this option will disconnect from the micro.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

137

Dial-Up Troubleshooting

Reference Topic:

Micro Utility Form

Your DiagView program logfile will indicate modem status by displaying one of two possible messages:

Message 1: The following modem is not functioning properly: <modem name>.

Message 2: The following modem is functioning properly: <modem name>.

Where <modem name>is the name of the modem, such as Hayes Accura 33.6.

Message 1 will display on the logfile every 90 seconds following a period when the modem is NOT

operating, until the modem is available and operational again. Verify the following:

•

Selected modem on Parameters Form is identical to the modem you want to use. (If the

modem you want to use is not on the list of available modems, you may have to reinstall the

driver for the modem or select another modem.)

•

Modem is turned on.

Comm port connection is complete.

Connection is plugged in properly.

Modem settings are correct. (Maximum speed value of 9600 applies to MOST modems. If

you are having problems using this setting, refer to your modem manual for more

information.)

Message 2 will display ONE time only, and that is when your modem returns to operational after a period

when the modem was NOT operational.

The Micro Utility Form will indicate that the micro dedicated to a modem is in an error state.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

138

DI Board Records Creation

When you add a 20 DI board, twenty (20) digital input records are created.

Example: 0001-1-01 DI

This digital input is on micro 1, board 1, point 1. To change this description, enter text over the existing

text and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmmm-b-ppprefix in each digital input

displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware. This field accepts a maximum of

64 characters.

Micro/PX-2000 ONLY: When you create and save a Micro/PX-2000 record, Secure Perfect creates

and supports 11 DI points; however, the 11^thDI is a low-battery alarm from the micro.

To configure the 11^thDI to function as a low-battery alarm:

1. Open the Digital Input form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of digital

inputs.

2. Select the DI labeled XXXX-X-11

where 11is the 11^thDI point of the Micro/PX-2000 micro board.

3. Select Alarm, from the drop-down list of available DI types.

4. Click Save.

5. Open the Alarm Form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of alarms belonging

to the micros.

6. Select the DI labeled XXXX-X-11

where 11is the 11^thDI point of the Micro/PX-2000 micro board.

7. Extend the Description entry by entering text indicating low battery.

The entry may look similar to 0002-2-11 Low Battery.

8. On the Alarm tab of the Alarm Form, select Monitor from the Settings options.

9. Click Save.

Digital Input

Device Menu

The Digital Input option opens the Digital Input form that allows you to modify the records that are

automatically generated when you define a micro. Example: Configure physical sensing devices such as

door sensors or motion sensors.

Digital Input Status

Operations Menu

The Digital Input Status option opens the Digital Input Status form that provides the status of the

selected digital input according to the information in the micro’s database.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

139

Digital Input Tab

Reference Topic:

DI Board Records Creation

Digital Input Form

Use this tab to configure the selected digital input.

Element

Micro

Description

Displays the micro description to which this digital input is associated. This is a read-

only field and unavailable for modification.

Board

Number

Type

Displays the micro board number where this digital input is located. This is a read-only

field and unavailable for modification.

Displays the number of the digital input. This is a read-only field and unavailable for

modification.

Select the type of DI that you are configuring. If you select another Type, click Search to

update the list box display of associated triggers.

•

Alarm means that this digital input is being used to trigger an alarm.

Elevator means this digital input is being used for elevator control.

Inactive means this digital input is not being used at this time.

Digital Output means this digital input is being used to trigger a digital output and no

alarm is generated.

•

Intrusion means this digital input will arm/disarm an intrusion zone.

Guard Tour means this digital input is a point along a pre-determined inspection

tour of your premises by a security officer.

Digital input Type of Intrusion can only be made if the previous type was Inactive,

meaning no other access control digital input was active. (For example, you cannot

assign Intrusion type to a DI that was previously set as an Alarm; the DI type must first

be Inactive.) Be aware that selection of this type overrides any access control. You

cannot assign any access control digital outputs, digital output groups, schedules, or

events for this record.

Active State

The active state of a selected digital input can be either Closed or Open.

A third option, Both, displays as grayed out and unavailable for selection unless the

DI Type is Guard Tour. During a Guard Tour, a single-state trigger (one-time "hit") will

trigger a DO in both states (Closed OR Open).

Enabled

If you selected Digital Output as the Type (defined above), enable this field to fire DOs.

For all other type Digital Inputs, this is a read-only field, enabled, and unavailable for

modification.

Sense time

Select or enter a sense time . Enter a number between 0 and 64.

Digital Output

Device Menu

The Digital Output option opens the Digital Output Form that allows you to modify the records that are

automatically generated when you define a micro. You can configure, schedule, and control the state and

times of digital outputs.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

140

Digital Output Assignment

This dialog box allows you to select and assign digital outputs you want associated with the selected

record. Only digital outputs in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available digital output.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a digital output.

Click OK to display results in the Digital Outputs windowpane.

Digital Output Group

Device Menu

The Digital Output Group option opens the Digital Output Group Form that allows you to assign digital

outputs into groups or sets for scheduling purposes. Example: To apply a schedule to a series of digital

outputs, apply the schedule to a group that contains the specific digital outputs.

Digital Output Group Assignment

This dialog box displays when you click Assign DO Groups, allowing you to select and assign DO groups

you want associated with the selected record. Only DO groups in the operators’ facilities are available for

assignment by this operator.

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group.

Click OK to display results in the Outputs Groups windowpane.

Digital Output Groups Tab

Access Right Form

This tab allows you to assign groups of digital outputs to access rights.

Assigned digital output groups: This windowpane displays a list of assigned output groups for the

current access right.

Assign Digital Output Groups : Click this button to display and assign digital output groups to the

selected access right. Only DO Groups that are related to the same micro as the readers selected in the

Access Right tab will be available for assignment. If no digital output groups display, verify that digital

output groups were set up on the Digital Output Group Form .

Digital Output Status

Operations Menu

The Digital Output Status option opens the Digital Output Status Form that displays the current status,

as found in the micro, for each DO (output) in the system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

141

Digital Output Tab

Digital Input Form

This tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input Tab. Use

this tab to link digital outputs to a digital input. When this digital input is activated, the digital output is also

triggered.

Output A (Primary/Local: A primary input assignment is not required. The default is None. Click the

drop-down list to select an available DO to assign as the primary. If you select an output, this output must

belong to the local micro. If the micro is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an

alarm, only the Primary/Local DO is triggered.

If the ON time on the Digital Output Form is set to 00, this DO will remain active until the digital input is

reset.

Output B:

Click the drop-down list to select an available DO. The digital outputs in this list can be on a local micro or

other micros. Output B will be activated only if the host is online and able to communicate with other

micros.

Digital Output Tab

Digital Output Form

Use this tab to schedule when the digital outputs in the group are in the active state and for the specified

length of time.

Micro

This is a read-only field. Displays the description of the micro on which this digital output is located.

Board

This is a read-only field. When the records are created, the default value is in the format: mmmm-b Board

Typewhere mmmmrepresents the micro number to which this reader is associated, brepresents the

board number, and Board Typeis the type of reader board, such as 16DO.

Example: 0001-1 16DOwould be the digital output on micro one, 16DO board one.

Number

This is a read-only field. Displays the number of the digital output.

Active state

On/Off: Defines whether the digital output will be turned On or Off when the digital output is activated.

Contact your installer on how the digital output was wired. This determines the active state of the digital

output.

On time: Specifies the length of time the digital output will remain in the active state before going

inactive. This time may be overridden by the manual control buttons. If you enter 0 and this is:

•

Output A, then the digital output will reset when the alarm resets.

Output B, then the digital output will remain on until it is manually turned off or scheduled off.

When a micro is reset or the database is reloaded, all schedules from midnight to present time will run

EXCEPT for schedules that have a DO On time NOT equal to zero and were set to occur prior to the

current time. For example, you have created a schedule to occur at 8:00 am to turn a digital output into

the active state for 1 minute. At 10:00 am, the database for the micro is downloaded. During the

download process all schedules from Midnight to the current time (10:00 am) are re-run. Your schedule

for the DO will not run since it started and ended before the current time of 10:00 am.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

142

Digital Outputs Tab

Alarm Form

Use this tab to link digital outputs to an alarm. When this alarm is triggered, the linked digital output is

also triggered.

Output A (Primary/Local): A primary output assignment is not required. The default is None. Click the

drop-down list to select an available DO to assign as the primary. If you select an output, this output must

belong to the local micro. Because Output A is only on the local micro, it will communicate even when

offline. If the micro is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm, only the

Primary/Local DO is triggered.

If the ON time on the Digital Output Form is set to 00, this DO will remain active until the alarm is reset.

Example: A motion detector (digital input) senses movement in a restricted area and triggers a bell

(digital output). An alarm is generated.

Output B:

Click the drop-down list to select an available DO. The digital outputs in this list can be on a local micro or

other micros. Output B will be activated only if the host is online and able to communicate with other

micros. It will not communicate if offline.

Digital Video Recorder

Device Menu

The Digital Video Recorder option opens the Digital Video Recorder form that allows you to define,

configure, and request status of your DVR.

Digital Video Viewer

Operations Menu

The Digital Video Viewer menu item on the Operations menu opens a video command and control

application that allows you to monitor digital video multiplexers/recorders and their associated cameras,

control live video, as well as search and play back recorded video events.

The Digital Video Viewer application can also be accessed from the Secure Perfect toolbar by clicking

this icon:

Digital Video Viewer has its own Help system that details the features of the application.

DI History

Reports Menu

The DI History option opens the DI History Report Form that allows you to create a report based on the

history of digital input transactions in the system.

Disconnect Client

Select this icon to disconnect the selected client. This option also displays on the shortcut menu for this

form. The shortcut menu displays when you click the right mouse button.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

143

DO Board Records Creation

When you add a 16 DO board, sixteen (16) digital output records are created.

Example: 0001-1-01 DO

This digital output is on micro 1, board 1, point 1. To change this description, type over the existing text

and save the record. It is recommended that you keep the mmm-b-ppprefix in each digital output

description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware. This field accepts a

maximum of 32 characters.

DO Groups Tab

Alarm Form

Use this tab to link digital output groups to an alarm. When this alarm is triggered, the linked digital output

groups are also triggered. The digital outputs will remain active until the alarm is reset, regardless of any

specified on-time setting for the DOs, unless it is the primary/local group.

•

If it is the primary/local group, the DOs will follow their specified ON-time setting.

If there is a reader in the primary/local group, the reader will follow the alarm state.

If the DOs in the primary/local group are set to 0for the ON time, that will force the DO to

follow the state of the alarm or input.

Be aware that Invalid Badge alarms and Lost Badge alarms do not reset. If you assign a DO Group to

either of these alarms, the alarm will go inactive or turn off when acknowledging or purging.

Output Groups: This windowpane displays assigned digital output groups. The digital output groups can

be on a local or other micro.

Assign DO Groups: Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box, allowing you to

select and assign alarm DO groups that you want associated with this alarm record.

Primary/Local Output Group: The first local output group in the list of assigned output groups will

automatically display as the primary. You can select another output group as primary from the output

groups displayed in the windowpane. If the selection is not on a local micro, the assignment arrow button

is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group. If the micro is offline or unable to

communicate with the host at the time of an alarm, only the Primary/Local DO group is triggered.

DO Groups Tab

Digital Input Form

Use this tab to link digital output groups to a Digital Input. When this Digital Input is triggered, the linked

digital output groups are also triggered. The digital outputs will remain active until the alarm is reset,

regardless of any specified on-time setting for the DOs, unless it is the primary/local group.

•

If it is the primary/local group, the DOs will follow their specified ON-time setting.

If there is a reader in the primary/local group, the reader will follow the Digital Input state.

If the DOs in the primary/local group are set to 0for the ON time, that will force the DO to

follow the state of the alarm or input.

Be aware that Invalid Badge alarms and Lost Badge alarms do not reset. If you assign a DO Group to

either of these alarms, the alarm will go inactive or turn off when acknowledging or purging.

Output Groups: This windowpane displays assigned digital output groups. The digital output groups can

be on a local or other micro.

Assign DO Groups: Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box, allowing you to

select and assign alarm DO groups that you want associated with this DI record.

Primary/Local Output Group: The first local output group in the list of assigned output groups will

automatically display as the primary. You can select another output group as primary from the output

groups displayed in the windowpane. If the selection is not on a local micro, the assignment arrow button

is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group. If the micro is offline or unable to

communicate with the host at the time of an alarm, only the Primary/Local DO group is triggered.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

144

Door Functions Tab

Reader Form

Use this tab to define the door settings associated with the selected reader.

Element

Description

Time

• Maximum unlock: The time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains unlocked after

the reader reads a valid badge. This is the amount of time that a user has to open a door

based on a valid input.

1) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 60 (maximum) minutes.

2) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 59 (maximum) seconds.

Example: A facilities employee may be required to move equipment or furniture in and out of

rooms. The assignment requires a block of time beyond the normal unlock time as configured

and sufficient time to empty or fill rooms through which access is gained by a reader and valid

facility badge.

• Alarm sense: The time interval in minutes and seconds that a door can remain open (with a

valid badge read or an exit request). This time must always be greater than the maximum

unlock time.

1) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 62 minutes.

2) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 59 (maximum) seconds.

The Alarm sense time for the Reader and the DI Sense Time on the DI form are added

together to determine the total time that a door can remain open before the system triggers a

Door Held Open alarm.

• Extended unlock: The extended time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains

unlocked after the reader reads a valid badge.

1) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 60 (maximum) minutes.

2) Enter a number between 0 (minimum) and 59 (maximum) seconds.

Example: If the door is used by handicapped persons or the reader is mounted at a distance

from the door, a longer unlock time may be required. If a 0 is entered in this field, the current

state of the reader is changed (or toggled) to its opposite state. The standard situation is the

first badge read causes the door to unlock and the next badge read toggles the door locked.

This time interval is also used if you selected Duration in the Lock On field below.

• Extended Alarm sense: This time interval is calcuated automatically and is a read-only entry.

The following illustrates time interval relationships:

The time intervals follow this formula:

extended alarm sense = alarm sense + extended unlock – maximum unlock

Door Lock

Once the door is unlocked, this field allows you to specify when the door should relock.

• Close: With this option, when the door is closed, the door lock will lock immediately regardless

of the Maximum Unlock Time (Maximum unlock field above) and the Alarm Sense Time

(Alarm sense field above) is reset to zero.

• Open: With this option, when the door is opened, the Maximum Unlock Time (Maximum

unlock field above) is set to zero and the door lock will lock. When the door is closed at any

time during this process, the Alarm Sense Time (Alarm sense field above) is reset to zero.

• Duration: With this option, after the Maximum Unlock Time (Maximum unlock field above)

expires, the door will lock when closed and the Alarm Sense Time is reset to zero. During the

Maximum Unlock Time, the state of the door does not affect the Maximum Unlock Time or the

Alarm Sense Time.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

145

• Open: Enable if the Exit Request button is wired as open for an exit request.

• Closed: Enable if the Exit Request button is wired as closed for an exit request.

• Unlocks door: Select this checkbox if you want the door to unlock when an exit request button

is pushed.

Request to

exit (REX)

• Follows extended unlock: Select this checkbox if you want this REX to follow the time limits as

configured for ‘Extended unlock.’

Extended

Auxilary

Digital

Select an output from the drop-down list of available Digital Output points. This output follows

the Extended unlock time configurations and must be on the same micro as this reader.

Output

Link to this

reader

Use this field to link this reader to another reader on the same micro. Select a reader from the

drop-down list.

Download Badges

Downloading includes the badge database records for that micro. This option forces a badge download

even if the micro is not configured for forced badge downloading. The badge download will not

automatically take place when the micro is placed online. You must initiate the download to send all

necessary badges to the selected micro.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Download Database

You may select more than one micro for a database download. All downloads happen simultaneously

without affecting the micro’s ability to process badge and alarm transactions.

Downloading a database does not download badges. If a new micro database is required, you must

click the Download Database icon as well as the Download Badges icon for this micro.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

DVR

Reference Topic:

DVR Disk is Full

Digital Video Recorder (DVR): A generic reference to CCTV equipment that can provide digital video

multiplexing and/or recording.

The Digital Video Viewer system program, accessible from the Operations menu, allows you to monitor

and control video for multiple DVRs and their associated cameras. Digital Video Viewer can also be

accessed on the Secure Perfect toolbar by clicking this icon from the toolbar:

On the Digital Video Viewer window, click Help for additional information about the program.

Refer to the User Manual of your DVR for specific installation, configuration, and operation instructions.

DVR Disk is Full

This warning notification may display when the DVR internal disk for storing video is reaching its full

capacity. Refer to the DVR User Manual for specific information on configuring disk management options.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

146

DVR Help

Welcome to Digital Video Viewer Help!

The Digital Video Viewer program allows you to monitor digital video multiplexers/recorders and their

associated cameras; control live video; and search and playback recorded video events. Operators must

be assigned to the specific facility and have Digital Video Viewer full permission for all forms.

Related Topic:

The Digital Video Viewer program window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop and

the position saved.

•

Move a Window

Left-click the title bar of any window and drag to desired position of your desktop.

Save Position

•

Point and right-click in data box or button panel background to display and select Save Position

shortcut.

When you exit and re-launch the Digital Video Viewer program, the window will display at the saved

position.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

150

DVR Help - Play Controls - Digital Video Viewer

The play controls allow you to control and adjust live video and playback of recorded video. The controls

affect all active video windows on the same DVR. The functions of the buttons are as follows:

Play Forward

Play Reverse

Fast Forward

Fast Rewind

Single Frame Advance

Single Frame Reverse

Stop

Pause

Play Speed adjusts the playback speed of recorded video. The DVR playback speed

can be adjusted by this slide option from minimum to maximum speed. This option is available only when

a search option is selected or playback of recorded video is activated.

Adjust playback of live video from a PTZ camera with the following controls:

Focus: Click to increase the sharpness of the image from the live camera display.

Focus: Click to decrease the sharpness of the image from the live camera display.

Iris: Click to allow more light to fall on the image-sensing device, appearing to increase the light of

the live camera display.

Iris: Click to close down or decrease the light falling on the image-sensing device. Sufficient light is

maintained and controlled for the live camera display.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

151

DVR Help - Recorded File Name

A 60D file name may display similar to the following:

c:\Program Files\GE Interlogix\Secure Perfect\Video\170-01 Camera

12_5_2003_4_04_30.60D

(If this is a custom installation and the file shares were separated from the Secure Perfect Application, the

default video folder resides on the File Server.) If you choose to store the video in another location, click

to browse and navigate to another location. You can assign additional alphanumeric characters to

the video file name to assist in identification. If the Location dialog box has a file name from a previous

recording, you will need to change this file name to avoid overwriting a previous recording. The following

characters are NOT permissible as part of a file name:

/ \ ? * < > | "

DVR Help - SP AutoPlay CD Creator

This window displays a list of previously recorded 60d files, recorded from a DVR. By default, the Video

folder of your Secure Perfect application displays. If video clips are stored in another folder, navigate to

that folder to display the video file names.

If you choose to record a video clip, performance will be compromised. If you have other surveillance

windows open, close them. You may want to continue surveillance at another computer while the video is

recording to CD.

If you have a recordable drive and Roxio Direct CD software:

1. Double-click the file name of the video you are going to record.

2. Verify the path.

3. Verify the naming convention of the video.

4. Verify the recording drive and device.

5. Click

to begin recording. The button displays red while recording. If you want to stop the

recording in progress, click the red button.

6. Follow the directions and prompts as they display in the popup windows.

GE Security uses only Roxio Direct CD software. If you purchased your system from GE Security,

Roxio software was provided for you.

DVR Help - Video Window On-Screen PTZ Control

Camera(s) with pan, tilt, and zoom capability can be manually controlled on screen from within a live

video window by use of the mouse. When placing your mouse pointer within a live video window of a PTZ

camera, the mouse pointer changes to a four-point star.

•

Center the mouse pointer, left-click, and hold for pan and tilt function (the pointer changes to

P/T).

•

Drag left or right to pan; release the left mouse button to stop.

Drag up or down to tilt; release the left mouse button to stop.

Center the mouse pointer, right-click, and hold for zoom function (the pointer changes to Z).

Drag up or down to zoom; release the right mouse button to stop.

Left-click (the pointer changes to P/T) and drag to the right to pan right.

When using on-screen PTZ control, it is helpful to start from the center position of the live video

window and initiate mouse control commands in short, smooth movements.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

152

DVR Search

Related Topic:

General Events Tab

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

A General Events search allows you to search alarms and events on the hard drive of the DVR.

A database search of General Events is not available without entering a DVR Source.

DVR Source

Select a DVR from the drop-down list. Only DVRs associated with facilities available for assignment by

this operator will display.

Search Range Calendar Entries

Select the check box on the left to make available the calendar entries. The calendar displays with the

current date and time as defaults. Establish the parameters of a video search:

•

Click a calendar day to start the search and a day to end the search.

Enter a start time and end time in the list boxes or accept the defaults.

This instruction begins the recall of video recording from the closest point to the time and date selected.

Click Search to display the results of parameters in the search results windowpane or continue to set

additional parameters.

Search Criteria

Cameras: Select the checkbox to enable/disable search criteria by camera. Click Cameras to display an

Edit Camera List assignment form. Select those cameras available for assignment by this operator that

you want to display in the camera windowpane. When the camera assignment form closes, the selected

cameras display in the camera windowpane.

Text: This is the default search criteria type. When Text is selected, the text content box becomes

available and accommodates the entry of a maximum of 50 alphanumeric characters. The asterisk (*) can

be used as a wildcard entry.

Alarm or Event: Change the type to camera Alarm or Event to search for alarms or events.

Search: Click Search to begin the recall of video based on the date/time and/or search criteria.

A search cannot be performed if recorded video is currently playing on the selected DVR.

While the search is in progress:

•

The Search button is unavailable.

Click Stop Search to discontinue the search in progress. If you do not discontinue, the search

will progress until all records matching the search criteria have been found. When a search is

ended, the Stop Search button changes state and is now a Clear button.

•

A statement displays indicating the number of records found. A flashlight icon indicates a

search is in progress.

•

Results are displayed in the Search Results windowpane.

Live video will play during a search.

Recorded video on the same DVR cannot play during a search

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

154

•

A search will terminate if the DVR goes into error.

If the search generates no records, a No Video Found dialog box will display.

Search results can be sorted by clicking the column header in the Search Results windowpane; however,

recorded video cannot be initiated during a sort. Select an entry, right-click, and select Play to begin the

playback of the associated recorded video. Playback of individual recorded video is limited to a single

recall instance per DVR. If you are unable to access a recorded video, a cautionary message will display.

It may be that the recorded video on the same DVR is presently being accessed or the recorded video

event has been overwritten and is no longer present in the DVR.

Click Clear to clear the search results displayed and return the form to default state. The search results

window clears.

Click Help to activate the Digital Video Search Help system.

DVR Search - General Playback

General Playback Tab

Related Topic:

Grabbing Motion Video Clips

Parameters set on this form search and retrieve video from the hard drive of the DVR. Playback

parameters selected here continue indefinitely until you choose to discontinue the playback.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Search on Date and Time

The calendar displays with the current date, and the current time displays in the time list box. Establish

the beginning parameter of a search by date and time. This instruction begins the recall of video

recording from the closest point to the time and date selected.

Search Source

Select a DVMR from the drop-down list. Only DVMRs associated with facilities available for assignment

by this operator will display.

Click Cameras to display an Edit Camera List assignment form. Select those cameras you want to

display in the camera windowpane. When the camera assignment form closes, the selected cameras

display in the camera windowpane.

Click Play to begin playing the associated recorded video. Playback of individual recorded video is limited

to a single recall instance per DVR. If you are unable to access a recorded video, a cautionary message

will display. It may be that the recorded video on the same DVR is presently being accessed, or the

recorded video event has been overwritten and is no longer present in the DVR.

Click Clear to clear the search criteria and results displayed. The search results window clears.

Click Help to open the Digital Video Search Help system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

155

DVR Search - Grabbing Motion Video Clips

When grabbing a video image from a selected camera, keep in the mind the following:

1. If a camera is currently recording live video, the motion grid grabs a still image of what is

currently playing on that camera.

2. If a video window is displaying previously recorded video, the motion grid will be populated with

a clip from the recorded video that is presently displaying in the window.

3. If two video windows are in progress from the same camera, one is live video, and the other is

previously recorded video, the grid grabs a still image from the live video.

4. If no video window is currently open, the system starts the selected camera if it is online, opens

a live video window, grabs an image, and displays a frozen image in the grid.

5. If the camera is a PTZ type, the video window opens and the system grabs a still image of

whatever is in focus at that moment.

6. If you want to display video for a specific preset area of a PTZ type camera, it is recommended

that you conduct a preliminary search on the SP Events tab or General Events tab before setting

your parameters on the Motion tab.

DVR Search - Help Button

Click Help to open the Digital Video Search Help system.

DVR Search - Motion

Motion Tab

Reference Topic:

Parameters set on this tab allow you to select a specific area of the image displayed on the grid. The

image was grabbed from live or previously recorded video. A search of the DVR hard drive is generated

based on the selected criteria.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated video.

DVR and Camera Source

You must select a DVR and a camera in order for the Search feature to become available.

•

DVR: Select a DVR from the drop-down list of online DVRs. Only online triplex DVRs

associated with facilities available for assignment by this operator will display.

Camera: Select an online camera from the drop-down list of cameras belonging to the

selected DVR. The grid immediately fills with an image grabbed from that camera. The image

may take a moment to freeze. If the camera is not online, the grid remains blank and no

image displays.

•

OPTIONAL: Search Range Calendar Entries

The calendar displays with the current date and time as defaults. The calendar is a way to establish the

parameters of a video search:

•

Click a calendar day to start the search and a day to end the search.

Enter a time in the start time and end time list box or accept the defaults.

This instruction begins the recall of video recording from the closest point to the date and time selected.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

156

Grid: When a camera is selected, a snapshot image is grabbed from the live video that is the focus of the

camera or from previously recorded video of that camera. The snapshot image is displayed in the grid.

Verify that the date/time caption at the top of the grid matches your request. By default, the grid displays

with rows of red cells. A portion of the image that is displayed in the grid window can be selected as a

way of narrowing the focus of the search.

Brush Size

The options below define a method of selecting a portion of the grid that will be the focus of the search

criteria. Left-click your mouse pointer within a cell; do not click between cells to select. The grid consists

of red cells that turn green when selected, or toggle from green to red, switching a mode on or off:

•

Single Cell: Select Single Cell, then move your mouse pointer over the grid and left-click a

cell. The single cell turns from red to green and the area within the selected cell is the focus of

the search criteria.

Row: Select Row, then move your mouse over the grid and left-click a cell. The entire row of

cells turns from red to green and the area within the selected cells is the focus of the search

criteria.

Column: Select Column, then move your mouse pointer over the grid and left-click a cell. The

column of cells turns from red to green and the area within the selected cells is the focus of

the search criteria.

3 x 3: Select 3 x 3, then move your mouse pointer over the grid and left-click a cell. The cell,

as well as all cells surrounding the cell, turns from red to green. The selected area is a total of

nine cells that turn from red to green and the area within the selected cells is the focus of the

search criteria.

The selections are toggle selections. That is, one click selects and the second click clears the

selection. If a row of cells is selected followed by a column selection on the same window that

intersects the selected row, the cell at the point of intersection will clear.

: Click to select all cells in the grid. All selected cells display in green.

: Click to clear all selected cells in the grid. All cleared cells display in red.

•

Click Search to begin the recall of video based on the date and time search criteria.

The Search Results windowpane returns a list of recorded video based on the parameters

and criteria specified. The Search Results windowpane is divided into columns labeled :

Sequence, Start Date/Time, End Date/Time, Camera, Type, and Text. Select the desired

Sequence and right-click to play the recorded video event. Playback of individual recorded

video is limited to one recall instance per DVR. If you are unable to access a recorded video

event, a cautionary message will display. It may be that the recorded video on the same DVR

is presently being accessed or the recorded video event has been overwritten and is no

longer present in the DVR.

•

Click Clear to clear the selected search criteria and search results windowpanes.

Click Help to activate the Digital Video Search Help system.

DVR Search - Play Button

Click Play Event to begin playing the associated recorded video for a selected entry on the search

results windowpane.

DVR Search - Readers Button

Click Readers to display an Edit Readers List form. This form displays a list of available readers that can

be selected and assigned as search criteria for recorded video event tags.

Select and then close the Edit Readers List form. The assigned readers will display in the Event Sources,

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

157

Readers list window.

DVR Search - Search Button

Click Search to begin the search and recall of video on the DVR hard drive for the recorded video tags

that meet the selected and assigned search criteria. The results are displayed in the search results

window.

DVR Search - SP Events

Related Topic:

Refer to Log On/Log Off or Shut Down .

SP Events Tab

DVR Search opens with the SP Events tab displayed.

Select the check box on the left to make available the Search button. In order to search the database

for existing records, enter an applicable date/time range and/or event source parameters.

Search Range Calendar Entries

The calendar displays with the current date and time as defaults. Establish the parameters of a video

search:

•

Click a calendar day to start the search and a day to end the search.

Enter a time in the start time and end time list box or accept the defaults.

This instruction begins the recall of video recording from the closest point to the time and date selected.

Click Search to display the results of parameters in the search results windowpane or continue to set

additional parameters.

Event Sources and Search Results

Narrow your search further by assigning additional parameters. This window displays options to search

for a recorded video sequence OR tagged event.

•

Click Readers or Alarms and Intrusion DIs to display a selection of devices and Intrusion type

digital inputs from which to search and display recorded data. If the reader or alarm

description has changed, request a search based on the old description.

•

You can also enter identifying text in the Event Tag dialog box to contribute to the search. A

search by Event Tag does not require a selection of Readers or Alarms.

Click Search . Only readers and alarms associated with facilities available for assignment by this operator,

and assigned to event triggers using the Event Trigger Form, will be displayed.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

158

The Search Results windowpane returns a list of recorded video event tags based on the parameter

criteria specified. The Search Results windowpane is divided into columns labeled : Sequence, Event

Tag, Camera Number, DVR, Date/Time, and Event Tag. Select the desired event tag and right-click to

display a shortcut menu.

•

Select Play Event for playback of individual recorded video events, limited to one recall

instance per DVR.

Select Play Single Recorded Frame to display the first frame of the event recording as a still

photo.

If you are unable to access a recorded video event, a cautionary message will display. It may be

that the recorded video on the same DVR is presently being accessed or the recorded video event

has been overwritten and is no longer present in the DVR.

Click Clear to clear the selected search criteria and search results windowpanes.

Click Help to activate the Digital Video Search Help system.

DVR Search - Stop Search

Click Stop Search to discontinue the search in progress. If you do not discontinue, the search will

progress until all records matching the search criteria have been found.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

159

Edit Alarm Group

This dialog box allows you to add or edit the link between an event and an alarm group. The event

determines when the alarm changes to the selected alarm group.

Event: Click the drop-down list to display available events from which to select.

New Group: Click the drop-down list to display available alarm groups from which to select.

Edit Icon

Click this graphic to open the Micro Form and edit the settings for the selected micro:

Edit Sense Time

Event: Select an event from the drop-down list. If there are no events listed, you will need to configure

events using the Event Schedule Form .

New time: Select or enter a sense time. The value is in seconds and indicates the delay before triggering

an associated digital output or sending in a Secure Perfect alarm if the DI type is Alarm. This number tells

the system how many seconds to wait after sensing the input has changed to Active State. Enter 00to

immediately send the transaction to the host, notifying the host of a state change. Increase the Sense

Time entry if using noisy or chattering contacts.

Example: This value could indicate the delay time, in seconds, that elapses between the time a door

contact is broken and the time the output and alarm are triggered. If door contact is closed before the

sense time elapses, the alarm would not come in to Secure Perfect and the output would not activate.

Elevator

Device Menu

The Elevator option opens the Elevator Form that allows you to configure elevator control records.

Elevator Assignment

This window displays when you click Assign Elevators, enabling you to select and assign an elevator

association for this form. Only elevators in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this

operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available elevator.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign an elevator.

The elevators that display in this list are those that are configured on the Elevator Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

160

Elevator Tab

Elevator Form

Select this tab to create or edit elevator information.

Reader

To tag a reader as an elevator reader, select a reader from the drop-down list of available readers. If no

readers are listed, check that the readers have been marked active on the Reader tab of the Reader

Form.

Floor Tracking

Select one of three options:

•

No Floor Tracking: Floor(s) selected are not sent to Badge History (not tracked).

Floor Tracking by Input: The floor(s) selected are sent to Badge History.

Floor Tracking by Keypad: Floor selection is made by using the keypad of the reader and

the floor(s) selected are sent to Badge History.

Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record. If you want to

change an existing record, delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking

method.

Interface

Select one of two options:

•

Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection: All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate.

The user can select one or more floors.

•

Trigger One DO upon floor selection: All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate.

The user can select only one floor.

Event Schedule

Administration Menu

The Event Schedule option opens the Event Schedule Form that allows you to define the time and day

of the week on which a device state will change, such as resetting an anti-passback status for entering

and leaving a building.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

161

Event Schedules Tab

Reference Topics:

Events Tab

Reader Type Events Tab

Event Schedule Form

Use this tab to create an event. Events are not partitioned by facilities . If you need to use facilities in your

system, create an event for each facility. Use the facility description as a prefix on the Event Schedule

Form, Description to indicate to which facility this event will apply.

Example: BocaHQ Weekend Beginswould indicate a facility-specific event schedule, where BocaHQ

refers to a geographic location. For example, you could create an event beginning each Friday at 6:00

P.M. that resets the APB status and the T&A status, and sets a reader to Badge and Keypad. Employees

coming into the building after 6 P.M. on Friday will be required to present their badge and then key in a

PIN number to enter the building. Remember that an event will stay in effect until another event occurs to

change it. Therefore, in our example, a second event will need to be scheduled to change that reader

back to Normal on Monday morning.

The time 24:00 is the same as 00:00 of the next day. For example, Friday at 24:00 is the same as

Saturday at 00:00.

•

Time chart: Click your mouse pointer on the time and day of the week/mode. This creates a

diamond that indicates that the event will occur at that time and that day of the week/mode.

Note that the current event’s diamond is selected. Time is displayed in half-hour increments

by default. To change the display increment, click and hold the left mouse button on the right

end of the bottom time bar then move the cursor to the left until you are at the desired time

increment. Then, click the desired time. If the point is incorrectly located, you can drag and

drop the point to the exact location you want.

•

Event: Displays the number of the event. The numbers start with one for the first event and

increment consecutively for each event thereafter.

New: Click to create a new event. The Secure Perfect application does not use these

additional points at this time.

Delete: Click to delete an event. You can delete a schedule that is currently in effect. The

Delete button will remove the most recent point you have created. If you continue to click

Delete, additional calendar points will disappear in the order they were created. Deleting a

schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is

associated. Any devices currently under the effect of the deleted schedule will remain in that

state until changed manually or by another event schedule.

Event details

The controls in this section are not needed in most circumstances. Use details to verify that your

selections match the calendar display.

•

Event time: Displays the time at which the event will occur.

Mode/day: Displays the mode or day on which the event will occur.

You will need to assign this event schedule to a device such as a micro (see Micro Form, Events tab)

or a reader (see the Reader Form, Reader Type Events tab).

Event Trigger

Administration Menu

Select Event Trigger to open the Event Trigger Form that allows you to associate cameras, presets,

reader transactions, and alarm transactions for creating event-driven video response. An event consists

of a camera and either readers or alarms.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

162

Events Tab

Alarm Form

Use this tab to assign events for alarm groups and alarm sense times. Events define start time(s) and

day(s) only. There is no end associated with an event. Therefore, that event will stay in effect until

another event changes it or you change it manually.

•

Alarm group: This windowpane displays assigned events and their associated alarm groups.

Edit: This button will be available only if you currently have a list of assigned events and

alarm groups. An Edit Alarm Group dialog box displays and allows you to modify the

selection of events and associated alarm groups.

•

Add: Click ADD to assign events to the specified alarm group. An Edit Alarm Group dialog

box displays enabling you to build a list of events and associated alarm groups.

Remove: Select an entry in the list of displayed events, then click Remove to remove from

the list.

Events Tab

Alarm Group Form

Use this tab to schedule changes to the sense time on all alarms in the group by assigning previously

defined events to alarm groups.

Alarm sense time events

This windowpane displays the currently assigned events and their associated sense time.

•

Edit: Will be available only if there are currently assigned alarm sense time events. This

button is used to modify existing alarm sense time events. The Alarm Sense Time form

displays.

•

Add: Click Add to assign events to the specified sense time. The Alarm Sense Time form

displays.

Remove: Select an alarm sense time event to remove and click.

Events Tab

Digital Input Form

This tab is unavailable for input if the Type of Digital Input is Intrusion.

Use this tab to assign events and an associated sense time to this digital input. Events define start

time(s) and day(s) only. There is no end associated with an event. Therefore, that event will stay in effect

until another event changes it or you change it manually. Click Search to display a list of existing event

records associated with this digital input.

Sense Time

This windowpane displays which events change the sense time. You can also assign events and sense

times to this digital input.

•

Edit: This button will be available only if there are currently assigned sense time events.

Click this button to display the Edit Sense Time dialog box. From here, you can assign an

event and sense time or modify the existing sense time assignment.

Add: To add events to the list, select an event and click. The Edit Sense Time dialog box

displays. Assign an event and sense time.

•

Remove: To remove events from the list, select an event and click.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

163

Events Tab - Micro Form

Micro Form

Use this tab to assign events to this micro.

Reset APB Event

Select an event from the drop-down list of available event records that will reset the anti-passback status

for all badges in the micro.

Reset T & A Event

Select an event from the drop-down list of available event records that will reset the T&A status for all

badges in the micro.

Exchange Key Encryption

Exchange encryption protects the Host-to-micro exchange of information. Assigning an exchange key

grants you a privilege of accessing the next level of encryption, the Data Encryption. You have two

options:

•

System: This method of encryption is more convenient but more vulnerable. The key is set at

the factory, system-generated, and exists in the Host software.

•

Custom: Setting up a Custom exchange key is the most secure method of encryption. The

Custom key is user-supplied. The installer can go to each micro and assign the exchange

key. When assigning a Custom exchange key, you must assign a total of 48 unique hex

characters, in three 16-character strings. Do not repeat any characters. This method of

encryption uses a three-pass authentication process. Starting at the left, the first pass

authenticates 16 hex characters. The second pass authenticates 16 hex characters. The

third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters.

Exit

Expiration Date Filter Tab

Badge Report

Use this tab to generate a report based on the expiration date of the badges.

•

Do not filter badges by expiration date: Select this field if you do not want to use the

expiration date as a method of filtering the report information. This is equivalent to running a

report on badges for all expiration dates.

•

Filter badges using this expiration date range: Select this field if you do want to use the

expiration date as a method of filtering the report information. If this is selected, you must

select a starting and ending date.

•

Starting date: Click the start date you want for the starting range of expiration dates.

Ending date: Click the ending date you want for the ending range of expiration dates.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

164

Export

File Menu

This option is available only when a Report Form is displaying. The Export option allows you to select an

export format for your report. There are a variety of formats available including text, Word for Windows,

Lotus, HTML, and Excel. Select an export destination for the report to a disk file, exchange folder, Lotus

Domino, Lotus Domino Mail, or Microsoft Mail (MAPI).

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

External Reports

Reports Menu

The External Reports option opens a Launch External Reports dialog that allows you to select an

executable program or report that was not created within SP. For example, you can access reports you

created using a third party report generator such as Crystal Reports or Microsoft Access 2002.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

165

Facilities Tab

Operator Form

Use this tab to assign facilities to an operator.

•

Assigned Facilities: This list displays the facilities assigned to the current operator.

Assign Facilities : Click to display the Facility Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign

facilities to this operator.

Facility

Administration Menu

The Facility option opens the Facility Form that allows you to label your facilities, related records, or

groupings of records. If Facilities are going to be used, the Facilities must first be defined in SP, on the

Facility Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

166

Facility

Reference Topics:

Facility Form

Operator Form

Permissions Form

Definition

The Secure Perfect database can be partitioned and grouped. These groupings are identified as

Facilities. If Facilities are not defined, all operators will be able to access all the Secure Perfect records,

based on the permissions associated with the form.

Reminders:

•

Facility partitioning does not involve access rights or who goes where.

The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the micro when a micro is

created.

•

Reports can be generated based on the currently active facility or all facilities assigned to the

current operator.

GLOBAL EDITION SYSTEMS: To view transactions outside of your region, you must have in

your active facility, the client’s facility where the transactions are occurring.

Sequence Guide:

1. If Facilities are going to be used, the Facilities must first be defined in SP, on the Facility Form.

When creating a Facility record, enter a description that uniquely identifies the location or function

of the facility.

2. Permissions are created and defined to determine what form and what fields will be available within

Secure Perfect.

The forms in Secure Perfect will display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions

assigned to the current operator. The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned

on the Permission Form.

3. Once defined, facilities and permissions are available for assignment to an operator on the

Operator Form.

a) At any given time, the current operator has the ability to select the active facility for that session,

from the list of all facilities that the current operator is allowed to see.

b) When a facility is assigned to an operator, it will display in the Facility drop-down list of Secure

Perfect forms after a successful login by that operator. Depending on assigned permissions, that

operator can now create records and assign facilities from the list that displays in the Facility drop-

down list.

Facility Assignment Dialog Box

This dialog box lists the facilities available for assignment to this particular operator.

•

Facilities can be moved to the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate arrow.

Facilities can be removed from the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate

arrow.

Facility Tab

Facility Form

Use the field on this tab to create facility records.

Description

Enter a description that uniquely identifies location or function of the facility. Click Save, and then click

Add Record to create additional facility records.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

167

File Menu Selections

The following selections display in the File drop-down menu:

Set As Default Template

Create Default Template

Delete Template

Check for Update

Exit

Filters Tab - Alarm History Report Form

Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Micro: Select the micro you want to use to generate report information. If you want to use all

micros, select <ALL>.

Alarm: Select the alarm you want to use to generate report information. If you want to use all

alarms, select <ALL>.

Priority: Select the alarm priority you want to use to generate report information. If you want

to use all alarm priorities, select <ALL>.

Filters Tab - Badge History Report Form

Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Badge Number: Select the range of badge numbers you want to display on the report. If you

want to list all badges, leave these fields blank.

Employee Name: Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report. If

you want to list all persons, leave these fields blank.

Employee Number: Select the range of employee numbers you want to display on the report.

If you want to list all numbers, leave these fields blank.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

168

Filters Tab - Badge Report Form

This tab is used only when generating a Badge Report . Use this tab to select the criteria by which this

report will be generated.

•

Badge Number: Select the range of badge numbers you want to display on the report. If you

want to list all badges, leave these fields blank.

•

Badge status: To provide additional filtering, you can also select to list only those badges

assigned a selected status.

Filters Tab - Device Report Form

This tab is used only when generating a Device Report. Filter or select specific information you want to

display on the report.

Device: From the drop-down list, select a device that you want to use to generate report information. If

you want to use all, select <ALL>.

The following exceptions apply:

•

If a Camera or Digital Video Recorder was selected as Report Type on the General tab, the

Device drop-down list fills with DVRs only.

•

If Alarm – API Connections is selected as Report Type on the General tab, the drop-down list

contains only <ALL>.

For all other Report Types, the list fills with micros.

Filters Tab - DI History Report Form

Use this tab to select or limit the criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

DI State: Select the state of this DI as Set, Reset, Open, or Short. If you want to use all DI

states, select <ALL>.

Micro: Select the micro you want to use to generate report information. If you want to use all

micros, select <ALL>.

DI Type: Select the DI type as Alarm, Elevator, or Inactive. If you want to use all DI types,

select <ALL>.

DI Description: Enter the range of device descriptions on which you want to report. Leave

blank for all descriptions.

Micro Description: Enter the range of micro descriptions on which you want to report. Leave

blank for all descriptions.

Filters Tab - Operator History Report Form

Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Activity Type: Enable the activity types on which you want to run the report.

to use all operators, select <ALL>.

•

Form Name: Select the forms you want to use to generate report information. If you want to

use all forms, select <ALL

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

169

Filters Tab - Person Report Form

This tab is used only when generating a Person Report . Use this tab to select the criteria by which this

report will be generated, allowing you to narrow the selection of information displayed on your report.

•

Employee Last Name: Select the range of person last names you want to display on the

report. If you want to list all persons, leave these fields blank.

Department: To provide additional filtering, you can select to run a report on only those

persons in a selected department.

Personnel Type: To provide additional filtering, you can also select to list only those persons

assigned a selected personnel type.

Filters Tab - Schedule Report Form

This tab is used only when generating a Schedule Report. Filter or select specific informaiton you want

to display on the report.

Micro: From the drop-down list, select the micro you want to use to generate report information. If you

want to use all micros, select <ALL>.

Filters Tab - Time and Attendance History Report Form

Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report will be generated.

•

Employee Last Name: Select the range of person last names you want to display on the

report. If you want to list all persons, leave these fields blank.

Department: To provide additional filtering, you can select to run a report on only those

persons in a selected department.

Personnel Type: To provide additional filtering, you can also select to list only those persons

assigned a selected personnel type.

Round By: Select the criteria by which you want the time of the time and attendance

transaction rounded by: Hour, Half Hour (30-minute increments), Quarter Hour (15-minute

increments) or Minute.

Filters Tab - Zone History Report Form

This tab allows you to limit the person or badgeholder records printed on this report.

•

Badge Number: Enter the range of badge numbers you want listed on this report. Leave

blank for all badges.

Employee Name: Enter the range of employee last names on which you want to generate a

report. Leave blank for all names.

Employee Number: Enter the range of employee numbers on which you want to report.

Leave blank for all numbers.

Find Badge

Select a reader from the drop-down list of this dialog box, present a badge at that reader, and this form

displays the record that is associated with the badge presented. If a record is not currently in SP, you can

add it. This is a convenient way of finding the badge record for a card without searching all records.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

170

Flash Micro Icon

Click this graphic to download the latest firmware to the selected micro:

When the Micro Flash & Micro Parameter Configuration dialog box displays, click Start Flashing

Micro(s).

Upgrades: Secure Perfect 6.0 software will communicate with micros flashed with 4.X and later firmware.

All offline badge and alarm transactions will be uploaded to the Server computer after the conversion

process and stored in the appropriate history table. Allow all the offline transactions to be processed

before flashing micros to the 6.0 firmware to minimize data loss. The duration of time to upload is

dependent on the number of transactions stored and the length of time that the Server computer will not

communicate with the micros. This might be a few minutes or serveral hours.

Floor

Administration Menu

The Floor option opens the Floor Form that allows you to create a description for a floor as well as

assign the floor number. This floor record will be used when configuring an elevator.

Floor Access

Reports Menu

The Floor Access option opens the Floor Access Report form that allows you to create a report based

on the floors defined in the system and the access granted to each floor

Floor Assignment

This window displays when you click Assign Floors, enabling you to select and assign a floor

association for this form. Only floors assigned to the selected elevators will be available for assignment.

Only floors in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available floor.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a floor.

The floors that display in this list are those that are configured on the Floor Form.

Floor/Digital Output/Digital Input Selection Dialog

Use this dialog box to create or edit a floor-to-digital-output-to-digital-input link.

•

Floor: Select a floor from the drop-down list of available floors.

Digital Output: Select a digital output from the drop-down list of available DOs.

Digital Input: Select a digital input from the drop-down list of available DIs.

Click OK to accept your selections and close this form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

171

Floor/Digital Output/Digital Input Tab

Elevator Form

This tab displays ONLY if you select Floor Tracking By Input from the Floor Tracking field on the

Elevator tab.

Select this tab to link a digital output and a digital input to a floor.

Elevator control does not span micros. This means the reader, digital outputs, and digital inputs (if

applicable) MUST be on the same micro.

Assigned Floor/Digital Output/Digital Input

This windowpane lists the currently assigned floors, digital outputs, and digital inputs.

•

Edit: To edit a floor/digital output/digital input link, select an entry from list and click this

button. The Floor/Digital Output/Digital Input Selection dialog displays.

Add: To add a floor/digital output/digital input link, click this button. The Floor/Digital

Output/Digital Input Selection dialog displays.

Remove: To remove a floor/digital output/digital input, select an entry from the list and click

this button.

Floor/Digital Output Selection Dialog

Use this dialog box to create or edit a floor-to-digital-output link.

•

Floor: Select a floor from the drop-down list of available floors.

Digital Output: Select a digital output from the drop-down list of available DOs.

Click OK to accept your selections and close this form.

Floor/Digital Output Tab

Elevator Form

This tab displays ONLY if you select No Floor Tracking or Floor Tracking By Keypad from the Floor

Tracking field on the Elevator tab.

Select this tab to link a digital output to a floor.

Elevator control does not span micros. This means the reader, digital outputs, and digital inputs (if

applicable) must be on the same micro.

Assigned Floor/Digital Output

This box lists the currently assigned floors and digital outputs.

•

Edit: To edit a floor/digital output link, select and then click this button. The Floor/Digital

Output Selection dialog displays.

Add: To add a floor/digital output link, click this button. The Floor/Digital Output Selection

dialog displays.

Remove: To remove a floor/digital output, select and then click this button.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

172

Floor Tab

Access Right Form

This tab allows you to configure controls for elevators and floors by assigning them to access rights.

•

Assigned elevators: This windowpane displays a list of the elevators assigned to the current

access right.

•

Assign Elevators: Click this button to display the Elevator Assignment dialog box and select

from a list of elevators available for assignment by this operator. If no elevators are listed,

check that the elevators have been configured on the Elevator Form.

Assigned floors: This windowpane displays the floors assigned to the current access right.

Assign Floors: Click this button to display the Floor Assignment dialog box and select from a

list of floors available for assignment by this operator. Only floors assigned to the selected

elevators will be available for assignment. If no floors are listed, verify that the floors have

been configured on the Floor Form.

•

Floor Tab

Floor Form

Use this tab to create a description for a floor

•

Description: Enter a description for the floor.

Floor Selection: Click the drop-down list of number to select a floor number.

Floor Tracking By Input

Define the floors available. Define a digital input (DI) and digital output (DO) for each floor. The DIs are

used for floor selection. Only DIs provided by the 20 DI board may be used for floor selection and each DI

may be used in only one elevator and mapped to only one floor. The DOs are used to control where the

elevator moves. Only DOs provided by the 16 DO board may be used and each digital output may only

be used in one elevator and mapped to one floor. A maximum of 32 floors can be supported.

Floor Tracking By Keypad

Define the floors available and define a digital output (DO) for each floor. The reader's keypad is used to

select the desired floor. Only DOs provided by the 16 DO board can be used. In addition, each DO may

be used in only one elevator and mapped to only one floor. The number of floors is limited by the number

of 16 DO boards that can be placed in the Micro/5-PX; the maximum is 4. Therefore, the maximum

number of floors available is 64 (4 boards x 16 DOs = 64 DOs).

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

173

Fonts Tab

This tab is used to change the fonts on selected text in the report, when generating any report.

Be careful when selecting font styles and sizes. Some styles may not appear as desired when printed

and some sizes may be too large for the page. Use the Print Preview option to check how the font style

and size will print on a page.

•

Title: To change the current font of the report title, click Change to display a list of available

fonts, font styles, and font sizes.

Header Fields: To change the current font of the report headings and/or field descriptions

within the report, click Change to display a list of available fonts, font styles, and font sizes.

Group Fields: To change the current font of the group headings, click Change to display a list

of available fonts, font styles, and font sizes.

Data Fields: To change the current font of the report information, click Change to display a

list of available fonts, font styles, and font sizes.

Page Footer: To change the current font of the report footer, click Change to display a list of

available fonts, font styles, and font sizes. The report footer contains the report title, current

system date, and the page number.

Functions Schedule Tab

Reader Form

Use this tab to select the schedules that will be used to set a reader offline/online or lock/unlock a door.

Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and

modes. At the start of the schedule, the state of the reader changes to the scheduled value. At the end of

the schedule, the state of the reader returns to the nonscheduled value. For example, if a reader is

scheduled online, it will return to offline at the end of the schedule.

Reader schedule

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Online/Offline: Select whether the schedule chosen above will set the reader online or offline.

Door schedule

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Unlock/Lock: Select whether the schedule chosen above will lock or unlock the door

controller by this reader.

•

Disable Auto Unlock: Select this check box to temporarily disable the schedule that would

automatically unlock a door at the start of a new time schedule. When a valid badge is

presented to the reader for the first time and during the current time schedule in effect, the

door unlocks for the first time and the schedule is now in place, as configured. If no valid

access has been detected from start of schedule to current time, the micro will continue to

wait for valid badge access before implementing the schedule. If a Lock schedule is selected,

this feature is grayed out and not available for selection.

Example: This is particularly helpful if a snowday or hurricane prevents employees from

entering the building at the normal time. Although the current schedule would normally unlock

the door, the door remains locked until the first employee arrives at the reader and presents

a valid badge.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

174

General Tab

Badge, Schedule, Floor Access, Reader Access, Roll Call, Alarm History, Badge History, Zone

History, DI History, Operator History Reports

Use this tab to set the general parameters for grouping and presenting the information of the form.

•

Report Title: Enter a name for this report, up to 64 characters.

Group Records: Select the field by which you want to group the records. Field titles vary with

type of report.

•

Sort Groups: Select the fields by which you want the groups sorted and position the fields in

order of precedence. If this box is empty, click Add to select fields.

Add: Click to select the fields by which you want to sort the groups. This displays the Sort

Fields dialog.

ꢀ

Delete: Select a field and click to remove a field from the Sort Groups list.

Up: Select a field and click to increase the priority of this field, which determines how the

groups will be sorted.

ꢀ

Down: Select a field and click to lower the priority of this field, which determines how the

groups will be sorted.

Example: To display and review a report of personal by Department, select the Group Records field as

Department. Select a Sort Group of Last Name, then First Name. Click Save. Select Print Preview from

the File menu. The report displays, sorted alphabetically by Department, then last name, then first name.

General Tab

Person, Administration, Device, and Time and Attendance History Reports

This form sets the parameters of the report.

Report Title: Enter a title for this report, of up to 64 characters.

Report Type: Select the type of report you want to run.

If this is a Person Report, the following options are available:

•

Access Rights Data provides a description of all access this person has, and if access is

granted all times in all modes.

•

Badge Data provides the badge number, PIN, status, issue, and expiration dates for each

badge the person has been assigned.

•

Location Data provides the address and telephone number for each person.

Standard Data provides the last name, first name, initials, personnel description, department,

employee number, and extended unlock time. This information is also provided on the other

report types for person reports.

•

User Data provides up to 90 user fields on each person. You can select which ones to

include in the report.

If this is an Administration Report, the following options are available:

•

Alarm Instruction provides a listing of alarm messages defined in the system.

Alarm Notifier provides a listing of e-mail alarm notification information defined in the system.

Alarm Routing and Bumping provides a listing of schedule descriptions, routing clients, time

to bump, bumping clients, routing clients, assigned alarms, and comments.

Archive provides a listing of all the archive files currently in the Database directory.

Badge Format (UBF) provides a listing of custom badge format types, data and parity

layouts, number of facility and badge characters, and comments.

•

Client provides a listing of the clients defined on the system, their Region, autoshutdown

selection, and whether they have an Imaging license.

Event Trigger provides a listing of defined event triggers defined in the system, including

Intrusion Zone events.

Events provides a listing of events defined on the system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

175

•

Facility provides a listing of all facilities defined on the system.

Floor provides a listing of floor descriptions and their associated floor selection numbers.

Guard Tour provides information associated with each Guard Tour configured in the Secure

Perfect system, including Groups, Tour Points, and badges assigned.

Host Parameter provides a listing of information from the Parameter Form, including

database connection timeout, database retry count, e-mail addresses, e-mails sent, and

duress.

•

Intrusion Zone provides a list of intrusion zones and the micros that own them.

Operators provides a listing of operators and their permissions defined on the system.

Permission provides a listing of permissions defined on the system.

Response provides a listing of responses defined on the system.

Schedules provides a listing of time and mode schedules defined on the system.

If this is a Device Report, the following options are available:

•

Alarm provides a listing of alarms defined on the system and alarm specific information.

Alarm – API Connections provides a list of alarm details defined in the system, received

through an external interface.

•

Alarm – Camera provides a list of Kalatel camera alarm details defined in the system as well

as the DVMRs that own them.

•

Alarm – DVMR provides a list of Kalatel DVMR alarms defined in the system.

Alarm Group provides a listing of alarm groups defined on the system and the micro that

owns the groups.

•

Cameras provides a list of cameras and camera details such as camera presets on the

system and the DVR(s) that own them.

Digital Input provides a listing of digital inputs (DI) defined on the system and DI-specific

information.

Digital Output provides a listing of digital outputs (DO) defined on the system and DO-specific

information.

Digital Output Group provides a listing of digital output groups defined on the system and the

micro that owns them.

Digital Video Recorder provides a list of DVRs defined on the system and DVR-specific

details.

Elevator provides a listing of elevators defined on the system and elevator-specific

information.

•

Micro provides a listing of micros defined on the system and micro-specific information.

Reader provides a listing of readers defined on the system and reader-specific information.

If this is a Time and Attendance Report, the following options are available:

•

First In Last Out calculates the difference between the first In transaction and last Out

transaction within the time period you specify on the Date Range tab. All other transactions

are ignored.

•

Paired In Out calculates the difference between all In and Out transactions within the time

period you specify on the Date Range tab. The earliest In is paired with the first Out following

it and both times are displayed together followed by the difference between them in hours.

The next In along with its paired Out are displayed together on the next line. This continues

until all Ins and Outs have been paired together and displayed.

An error message will display if:

•

There is not a matching number of In transactions and Out transactions within a specified

time period.

•

There are two In transactions without an Out between them.

There are two Out transactions without an In between them.

Group Records: Select the field by which you want to group the records. This provides the organization

of the report. The choices in the drop-down list correspond with the selection of Report Type. This option

may not be available on all report types.

Sort Groups: Displays the fields in order of precedence by which the groups will be sorted. If this box is

empty, click Add to display a list of available fields. This option may not be available on all report types.

•

Add: Click to select the fields by which you want to sort the groups. This displays the Sort

Fields dialog.

•

Delete: Select a field and click to remove a field from the Sort Groups list.

Up: Select a field and click to increase the priority of this field, which determines how the

groups will be sorted.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

176

•

Down: Select a field and click to lower the priority of this field, which determines how the

groups will be sorted.

Global Edition Regional Configuration Rules

This topic addresses administration and behavior of a successful Secure Perfect Global Edition system.

Particular functions in the Global Edition must be handled locally, at the Regional level. The following

table is an overview of administrative functions and links to forms where configuration and behavior must

be considered.

Secure Perfect

Form

Updates Allowed

in Remote

Regions?

Deletions

Allowed in

Remote

Comments

Regions?

Access Rights Form

– Readers Only

Yes

Adding or deleting readers from an access

right for a local Region or remote Region:

The micros get updated with the correct

reader information in both cases

Digital Output Groups, Elevators, and

Zone assignment for access right must

wait until replication interval to update the

remote database and then perform a

database download to micros in the

remote Region.

Alarm Form

No (See

Comments)

N/A

Updating in a Remote Region: Updates to

nonmicro alarms (such as CCTV, Camera,

and DVR alarms) are allowed. Updates to

devices directly controlled by I/O boards in

the micro (such as digital inputs and

readers) are not allowed. They must be

updated at a local Regional level.

N/A

Yes

No action required.

Backup Clients tab, Assign micro phone

numbers

No action required.

Digital Input Form

Digital Output Form

N/A

Digital Output

Group Form

Digital Video

Recorder

Yes

Editing a DVR in a remote Region: Wait for

replication to occur before changes take

effect. If user changes the host name to a

remote client, wait for replication to occur

and then restart the hosting client’s

services.

Adding a DVR in a remote Region: Wait for

replication to occur and then restart

services on the remote client.

Elevator Form

Yes

Editing an elevator in a remote Region:

Edits will not be applied until replication

occurs on the remote database. After

replication, the operator must manually

initiate a database download from the

Micro Utility Form in order for changes to

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

177

take effect.

Event Schedule

Form

Yes

Updating remote Regions: Wait for

replication interval and then perform a

database download. Applies to adds and

deletes.

Floor

Yes

No action required.

Intrusion Zone

Form

Manual Control

Form

Yes

No action required.

Micro Form

Editing a micro in a remote Region: Wait

for replication to occur and then perform a

database download to that micro. If the

user changes the host name to a remote

client, wait for replication to occur and then

restart the hosting client’s services.

Adding a micro in a remote Region: Wait

for replication to occur and then restart

services on the remote client.

Mode Schedule

Form

Yes

Updating remote Regions: Wait for

replication interval and then perform a

database download. Applies to adds and

deletes.

Override Form

Reader Form

Yes

N/A

Yes

No action required.

Time Schedule

Form

Yes

Updating remote Regions: Wait for

replication interval and then perform a

database download. Applies to adds and

deletes.

Tour Point Form

N/A

All tour points must be associated with

micros within the same Region.

Group Tab

Alarm Group Form

Use this tab to schedule when the alarms in the group are monitored or when to print alarm transactions

by assigning previously defined time schedules to alarm groups.

Number: This is a read-only field. Displays the number of the alarm group.

Micro: This is a read-only field. Displays the description of the micro on which this alarm group is located.

Monitoring

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

On/Off: Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor the alarm group or Off if

the above schedule is when you do not want to monitor alarms belonging to this alarm group.

Print Alarm

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Yes/No: Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms belonging to this

alarm group or No if the above schedule is when you do not want to print alarms belonging to

this alarm group.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

178

Guard Tour Assignment Dialog Box

This window displays when you click Guard Tour Assignment, enabling you to select and assign Guard

Tours that you want to trigger an event.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign a Guard Tour.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a Guard Tour.

Click OK to display the results in the Assigned Guard Tours windowpane.

Group Tab

Digital Output Group Form

Use this tab to assign digital outputs to a selected digital output group on a specified micro.

Number

This is a read-only field displaying the number assigned to the digital output group.

Micro

This is a read-only field displaying the description of the micro on which this digital output group is

located.

Digital Outputs

This windowpane displays the digital outputs assigned to this group.

Assign Digital Outputs

Click this button to display the Digital Output Assignment dialog box. This dialog lists all digital outputs

available.

Guard Tour

Administration Menu

The Guard Tour option opens the Guard Tour form that allows you to enter a description for your Guard

Tour inspection and configure the Tour Manager PC, Start Point, tour time, and points.

This option is unavailable if you are not licensed for Guard Tour.

Guard Tour History

Reports Menu

The Guard Tour History option opens the Guard Tour History Report Form that allows you to generate a

report of completed tours displaying tour activities such as start points, hits, invalid points, pauses,

resumes, tour end points, tour time exceeded, manual start and manual stop.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

179

Guard Tour Tab - Guard Tour Form

Reference Topic:

Point Assignment Dialog Box

Badge Assignment Dialog Box

Configure the specifics of this tour by completing the elements displayed on this tab.

Requirements are indicated by an asterisk.

Element

Description

Tour Host Computer*

From the drop-down list, select the computer that will host this tour. Guard

tours must be owned by a specific client host.

Start Tour Point*

From the drop-down list, select a tour point as the start point of this tour.

•

Only direct and network micro devices display in this drop-down list.

•

When you select a start point,

becomes available.

Enter the maximum number of minutes that this tour is allowed to last.

When the maximum time is reached, a tour is ended automatically.

The default and maximum number of minutes in this field is 480.

Max tour time (min)*

•

Route Activity to

Printer

Select this check box to route badge activities to a selected and enabled

system printer at the client computer that is hosting the Guard Tour. You must

have two separate printers configured if you are using a printer for tour

activitiess and a printer for badges.

•

Displays a list of assigned tour points. All tours are random. A random tour

is a tour where all of its points do not need to be hit in a particular order,

except the assigned start point.

Tour Points*

•

Every time this tour is executed, the order of ‘hit’ points can vary. A random

tour ends automatically when all of its tour points have been hit.

Click to display a Point Assignment dialog box, allowing you to assign Tour

Points to this tour.

Assign Tour Points*

Selection results display in the Tour Points windowpane.

Move Up

Select and click to move this Tour Point up the list. This tour point order

displays on the Manual Control form, Guard Tour tab.

Move Down

Select and click to move this Tour Point down the list. This tour point order

displays on the Manual Control form, Guard Tour tab.

Tour Badges*

Assign Tour Badges

Displays a list of assigned tour badges. At least one badge must be assigned

to a tour.

•

Click to display a Badge Assignment dialog box, allowing you to assign

badges to this tour.

If a reader is assigned as a tour point, a badge must be assigned before

this Guard Tour record can be saved.

Click to save this tour record and simultaneously create a new alarm,

Guard Tour Max Time Exceeded.

If you have not completed the required elements, you cannot save.

Save*

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

180

Guard Tour Tab - Manual Control Form

Reference Topics:

Guard Tours Form

Tour Point Form

This tab does not display if you are not licensed for Guard Tour.

The purpose of using this form is to manually start, pause, resume, or stop a Guard Tour that is currently

in progress. The upper windowpane displays all Guard Tours configured in your Secure Perfect system to

which this operator has access.

Element

Description

Upper Windowpane:

•

Guard Tour

Tour State

A list of configured tours descriptions in the Secure Perfect system.

This column displays the current state of all Guard Tours in your Secure

Perfect system. Typical states are: 1) Tour Started; 2) Tour Not Started; 3)

Tour Paused.

•

Time to Complete

Client Description

This column displays the estimated time assigned for completion of a tour,

based on the clock time that this tour started and maximum tour time

allowed. If a tour is paused and later resumed before expiration of

estimated completion time, the remaining unused tour time is reflected in

the Time to Complete column.

This column displays the client that is hosting the selected tour. A color

indicator displays the current connection status of the client that is hosting

the selected tour.

•

Green indicates online.

Red indicates offline.

Lower Windowpane:

•

Tour Point

This column displays a list of points associated with the selected Guard

Tour.

•

Point Status

This column displays a ‘hit’ or ‘not hit’ real-time status. You do not have to

refresh your window to see the current state of the tour points for the

selected tour.

•

Last Hit Time

This column has an entry following a valid ‘hit’ to this point.

Set Tour to:

•

Start

Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane. Click

to manually begin a Guard Tour. The Tour State column indicates ‘Tour

Started.’

Stop

Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane. Click

to prematurely stop a tour in progress. The Tour State column indicates

‘Tour Not Started.’ This button is not available if a tour is not in progress.

Resume

Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane. Click

to resume a tour that was previously paused. The Tour State column

indicates ‘Tour Started.’ This button is unavailable if a tour is not in

progress. This button is not available if the time assigned for the selected

tour has expired.

•

Pause

Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane. Click

to pause a tour that is currently in progress. The Tour State column

indicates ‘Tour Paused.’ This button is unavailable if a tour is not in

progress.

Purpose

Specify a reason for stopping or starting this tour. Enter a brief statement

about the operator’s actions.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

181

Guard Tours Tab - Guard Tour History Report

Click Edit to display the Guard Tour Assignment Dialog Box , enabling you to assign Guard Tours for

which this report will generate.

The assigned Guard Tours display in the open window pane of this tab.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

182

Help Doesn't Display in My Assigned Language

This occurs when you are using either a non-English operating system or a non-English Secure Perfect

and you did not correctly shut down SP. To eliminate this problem, you MUST select the File menu and

then Exit to correctly shut down SP.

Help Topics

Help Menu

Selection of this option starts the Secure Perfect Help system.

You can also click the Help icon to access Help

, then move the ? over any area of your display and

click again. A window will open with information pertaining to the selected section.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Using Help Contents

Using Help Index

Using Help Search

Hex Characters

Valid and allowable hex characters include the base 16 numbering system (0 through 9 and A through F).

How Do I Perform a Search on a Specific Form

The Secure Perfect Search button can be found on any form that provides search capabilities. If you click

this button when the current form is blank, all records will be returned. To specify criteria, fill in the

information.

Example: If you want to find all badgeholders with the last name Smith, type Smithin the Last name

field and click Search.

You can also use the * character that allows you to search for patterns.

Example: A search for badgeholders with the last name starting with Sm*would yield such names as

Smithand Smythers.

How Do I Put a Reader Online

From the Secure Perfect main menu, go to Device, then Reader. Click Search to display existing reader

records. From the right windowpane, select the reader you want to set online, then select Online and

Active.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

183

How Do I Remove an Alarm from the Alarm Monitor Form

When an alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor Form, appropriate action should be taken. For example,

you may want to send a guard out to check that a door is secure. Once the alarm has been investigated

and reset, if necessary, it should be removed from the Alarm Monitor Form.

1. Some alarms may require an acknowledgment before they can be removed. This feature is set on

the Alarm Form. To acknowledge the alarm:

ꢀ

Without a response, click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm will change to

Acknowledged.

ꢀ

With a response, click Responses to select a predefined response or enter your own in the

Response field. Then, click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm will change to

Acknowledged.

2. To remove an individual alarm without waiting for it to reset, highlight the alarm and click Remove

Individual.

3. If you have permission, you can remove all alarms in one action by clicking the Remove All icon:

How Do I Troubleshoot My Global Edition System?

Reference Topic:

Replication and Synchronization Conflicts

Review the Secure Perfect 6.0 Installation Guide chapter covering "Installing Secure Perfect 6.0 Global

Edition." Confirm and review your configuration options, then review the Troubleshooting section.

Additionally, refer to Microsoft Replication software documentation in printed and electronic format.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

184

Installing the Printer Driver

To install the print driver for your badge printer:

1. Follow the instructions shipped with your printer.

2. Select the appropriate printer port.

3. Select a name for the printer and indicate if it is the default printer.

4. Do not print a test page; click Finish.

5. After the installation is complete, move the mouse pointer over the printer icon, click the right

mouse button, and select and set Properties.

6. Complete the printer setup and then click Exit.

NOTES:

• The printer may NOT support transparent bitmaps.

• If the printer run out of cards or the ribbon need to be replaced while in the process of producing

badges, an error message will display. Correct the condition at the printer and then put the printer back

online before continuing with your print job.

Instruction

Administration Menu

The Instruction option opens the Alarm Instruction Form that allows you to create instructions on how to

react to alarms and link with alarm records. The instruction(s) will then display on the Alarm Monitor Form

when the alarm occurs.

Intrusion Zone

Administration Menu

The Intrusion Zone option opens the Intrusion Zone Form that allows you to create zones, assign

intrusion DI, intrusion DO, alarms, and readers. The Status Tab displays current state of the zone and

status of all assigned devices.

Intrusion Zone Assignment Dialog Box

This window displays when Assign Intrusion Zone is clicked on the Intrusion Zones tab of the Access

Right form or Event Trigger form. The window displays a list of all intrusion zones for the micros in the

facilities available for assignment by this operator. You can assign an unlimited number of intrusion zones

to an access right.

•

Select, then click the right arrow to assign an available intrusion zone.

Select, then click the left arrow to unassign an intrusion zone.

Click OK to accept the selections and display the Intrusion Zones in the Assigned Intrusion Zones list

box.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

185

Intrusion Overview

Reference Topics:

Arm/Disarm an Intrusion Zone

Intrusion Zone Form

Activity Monitor Form

About Intrusion Options

Intrusion functionality provides the ability to define local intrusion zones per micro that consist of:

•

Readers

Alarms

Arm/disarm input point Intrusion DI

Arm/disarm output point DO

The defined intrusion zones have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access control by using a

card and keypad reader, DI, or manual control.

The intended application is suited for arming and disarming intrusion zones from outside of the monitored

and secured areas. Based on Secure Perfect system architecture, it is not our intent to fully emulate

traditional Burg/Intrusion panel functions but to provide similar functionality for less stringent

Burg/intrusion requirements that can be taken on natively within the access control system. Additionally,

the system provides increased value by allowing cross-system functionality between the Secure Perfect

micro and vendor-independent Burg/Intrusion panels.

Arm/Disarm Intrusion Point - Digital Input Form

•

An Intrusion DI Type has been added to the drop-down list on the Digital Input Form, Digital

Input tab.

When the Arm/Disarm Intrusion point is set/active (Armed), the associated zone is armed by

placing all readers offline, all alarm points monitored on, and the arm/disarm DO goes active.

When the Arm/Disarm Intrusion DI is reset/not active (Disarmed), the associated zone is

disarmed by placing all readers online, all alarm points monitored off (unless on a schedule),

and the arm/disarm DO goes inactive.

Intrusion Zone – Intrusion Zone Form

The Intrusion Zone Form is required for creating a relation between readers, alarm inputs, the

Arm/Disarm Intrusion point, and the arm/disarm DO.

1. An Intrusion Zone is defined with a description and facility assignment.

2. A micro selection is required to establish the zone source and its intrusion points.

3. The Intrusion Zone tab provides for the assignment of the following intrusion zone components:

arm/disarm DO, arm/disarm Intrusion DI, readers, and alarms.

ꢀ

Arm/Disarm Intrusion DI: This is a single record selection from a drop-down list filtered by

active facility that consists of all available Arm/Disarm Intrusion points for the micro. Only the

Dis that have not been assigned will be available.

Alarm Points: This is a multi-record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active

facility that consists of available micro alarm points not already assigned to a zone. (24/7 4-

State Supervision rules apply regardless of the Armed/Disarmed state of the zone.)

Readers: This is a multi-record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility

that consists of available readers not already assigned to a zone. (Readers must be active

and nonelevator type.)

A zone can be configured to contain the following:

An Arm/Disarm Intrusion Point with Alarm Points only and no Readers.

An Arm/Disarm Intrusion Point with Readers only and no Alarm Points

Alarm Points and Readers only with no Arm/Disarm Intrusion Point.

Readers only.

An arm/disarm DO can be assigned for any of these.

4. A Status tab provides the ability to request status of the zone and each of its associated points, as

follows.

ꢀ

Zone: Armed or Disarmed

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

186

ꢀ

Arm/Disarm Intrusion DI: Active/Inactive/Trouble

Readers: Online or Off-Line

Alarm Points: Monitored Off/Monitored On

Arm/Disarm By Access Right

The Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right Form allows you to assign multiple intrusion zones using an

assignment dialog.

•

Only badge holders with an Intrusion Zone assigned on the Access Right Form will be able to

arm and disarm zones using any of the card/keypad readers within a zone.

When a zone is armed, all readers within the zone will go offline, and normal access rights

will not gain access into the area.

When a zone is disarmed, all readers within the zone will go on-line and normal access rights

will gain access into the area. If schedules were assigned, then the reader will follow the

schedule.

If you expect to arm/disarm by using any one of the readers within a zone:

•

That reader must be assigned on the Access Right tab of the Access Right Form and be an

assigned reader in the Intrusion Zone listed on the Intrusion Zone tab.

•

Individually created access rights must be assigned to the person that will arm/disarm the

Instrusion Zone. (One right will allow access to the readers and another right will allow

access to the Intrusion Zone.)

Arm/Disarm by Manual Control

Manual zone control for arming and disarming is accomplished using the Intrusion Zone tab on the

Manual Control Form. This follows the standard Manual Control Form conventions including a Purpose

entry by the operator.

Intrusion Zone Tab

Reference Topic:

Intrusion Zone Form

Intrusion Zone Assignment Dialog Box

Access Right Form

This tab allows you to assign intrusion zone control to previously created access rights. Access to a

reader and access to an intrusion zone are two separate access rights. Only badge holders with an

Arm/Disarm Intrusion Zone access right will be able to arm and disarm zones by accessing a

card/keypad reader within a zone. When a zone is armed, all readers within that zone go off-line;

therefore, normal access rights will not gain access into the area.

Assigned Intrusion Zones: This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned intrusion zones for

the currently selected access right record.

Assign Intrusion Zone: Click this button to display the Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box, allowing

you to assign and unassign intrusion zones to the selected access right. If no intrusion zones display,

verify that intrusion zones were configured on the Intrusion Zone Form.

If you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an Intrusion Zone due to a schedule in that

access right, you will not be able to arm/disarm a zone.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

187

Intrusion Zone Tab - Event Trigger Form

Reference Topic:

Intrusion Zone Assignment

This tab allows you to assign Intrusion Zones and Intrusion Zone transaction type(s) that will become the

source for this Event Trigger.

Element

Description

Transactions:

Select any one or all of the types of Intrusion Zone

transactions that will trigger an event.

•

Arm

Intrusion Zone arm transaction in progress.

Intrusion Zone disarm transaction in progress.

Disarm

Invalid

Intrusion Zone arm/disarm transaction failed for one of the

following reasons:

•Device or badging failed. The zones are not secure.

•The arm/disarm device is not a part of the selected

zones.

•The 10-second time period allowed for completion of

the arm/disarm process at keypad and reader, has

expired.

•The presented badge does not have access rights for

transactions in the selected Intrusion Zones.

Tag Selection:

Select one of the options.

•

None

No tag is sent for marking a recorded video or

manipulating the record rate.

Tag only

Tag as event

A tag is sent for marking recorded video at the camera(s)

current record rate.

A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and

for changing the camera(s) record rate to its event record

rate settings.

Assigned

Intrusion Zones

This list box displays those Intrusion Zones that you have

assigned to this Event Trigger.

Assign Intrusion

Zone

Click to display an Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box,

listing available Intrusion Zones in your Secure Perfect

system. Those zones selected and assigned when you

close the dialog box, will display in this list box.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

188

Intrusion Zone Tab

Reference Topic:

Arm/Disarm an Intrusion Zone

Intrusion Zone Form

This tab allows you to edit or create an intrusion zone record and associate DI, DO, and devices such as

readers and alarms in the operators’ selected facilities .

Number: Assign and enter a number for the intrusion zone, between 1 and 96. Duplicate numbers are

allowed but not on the same micro.

Micro:

Select a micro from the drop-down list of available micros that will control this intrusion zone. This is a

one-to-one relationship and establishes the zone source and intrusion/access points. The micro must be

connected and online.

A Reader or Digital Input and Alarm must be selected in order to save this record.

Arm/Disarm DO: Select one DO from the drop-down list of DOs that will trigger when an Intrusion Zone

is armed/disarmed. This is an optional assignment. This DO can be assigned to another Intrusion Zone.

Arm/Disarm DI: Select one DI for the drop-down list of available DIs of the Type Intrusion, as

assigned on the Digital Input Form. This DI can arm/disarm an Intrusion Zone and is an optional

assignment. This DI cannot be assigned to another Intrusion Zone.

When you unassign a DI, save this record. It is now available to re-assign this DI to another Intrusion

Zone.

Last Status:

•

Date: Date of last zone history transaction on record.

Time: Time of last zone history transaction on record.

Status: Status as of last zone history transaction on record.

In order to refresh this status section, click off of this record then back or close then reopen the form

Devices

Assigned Readers: This list box displays a list of available, active readers in the same zone, belonging

to the selected micro. You must assign at least one reader OR a digital input and alarm to an Intrusion

Zone. The reader cannot be assigned to an elevator. Click Assign Readers to display a dialog box that

enables you to assign active readers.

Assigned Alarms: This list box displays a list of intrusion alarms in the same zone, not already

assigned, on the selected micro. This cannot be an external, DVMR, or a logical such as Host Comm or

Lost Badge alarm. Click Assign Alarms to display a dialog box that enables you to assign alarms. This is

an optional assignment.

Arm Delay (sec)

Arm Delay: Enter the number of seconds to delay the arming of this intrusion zone. This field accepts up

to 255 seconds. This time limit should allow a person to pass into or out of a monitored area before the

zone is armed.

If your system is UL-listed, the delay cannot exceed 60 seconds. Refer to the UL Certification

Requirements in your Secure Perfect Installation Manual.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

189

Intrusion Zone Tab

Reference Topic:

Intrusion Overview

Manual Control Form

This form allows you to manually control the Intrusion Zone, and takes the Intrusion Zone from one

condition (armed) to another condition (disarmed), depending on the current operator’s permissions .

Example:

•

When the Zone is Armed, readers will not allow access to anyone, alarm points are

monitored, and schedules are ignored.

•

When the Zone is Disarmed, personnel require only access rights for readers.

Select micro

Immediately following selection of a micro, the system searches and displays Intrusion Zone records in

the list box windowpane, associated with the selected micro.

•

All displays all micros in the operator’s facilities.

By Micro displays records for a specific micro. Click the down arrow to display the list of

micros.

Columns in Windowpane

•

Description: Description of the Intrusion Zone in the database.

Micro: Micro on which the Intrusion Zone Control is located.

Set State To:

•

Arm: Immediately arms the selected Intrusion Zone.

Disarm: Immediately disarms the manual Intrusion Zone.

Purpose

When you select an Intrusion record, this box is enabled. Enter an explanation for arming/disarming the

Intrusion Zone. This field accepts 255 alphanumeric characters. These comments are written to the

operator history file and display in the Purpose Field, on the Operator History Report.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

190

Keypad Alarm Shunting

Reference Topics:

Both Read/Keypad Type Reader

Keypad Only Type Reader

Normal Type Reader

The keypad alarm shunting feature allows you to turn the monitoring of a group of alarms off or on using

the keypad. This can also be accomplished by setting up a schedule for an alarm group using a time

schedule.

Only reader board door inputs and 20DI board input points can be shunted from a keypad.

• To identify a reader board door input, look for a default description that follows this format: 0001-1-01

Reader.

• To identify a 20DI board input point, look for a default description that follows this format: 0001-1-01

DI.

Keypad Only Type Reader

Only reader board door inputs and 20DI board input points can be shunted from a keypad. (To

identify a reader board door input, look for a default description that follows this format: 01-1-01 Reader.

To identify a 20DI board input point, look for a default description that follows this format: 01-1-01 DI.)

Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a micro connected to a keypad reader.

1. Click the start key on the keypad. The start key is labeled with either an asterisk <*> or a plus <+>

depending on the reader model.

2. Type one of the following:

0 - to turn monitoring off

1 - to turn monitoring on

3. Type the alarm group number (00 to 15) you want shunted.

4. Click the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign (#) or an <x>.

5. Click the start key on the keypad again.

6. Type your badge number on the keypad.

7. Click the end key (<#> or <x>).

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

191

Launch Client

Select this icon from the Client Monitor toolbar, to enable a CCTV interface (other than integrated CCTV).

This option also displays on the shortcut menu for this form. The shortcut menu displays when you click

the right mouse button.

Licensing

Reference Topic:

Refer to Log On/Log Off or Shut Down .

Your Secure Perfect software is licensed during the installation process. The license sequence is also

an item on the Start, Programs, Secure Perfect menu. Refer to the SP License Help system for

additional details of the licensing procedure.

Your license included Imaging software for Secure Perfect that controls the number of clients that can

launch Imaging. Imaging installs with every Secure Perfect installation; however, you cannot enable

Imaging on more computers than you have Imaging licenses. (Only clients that have an Imaging license

enabled can capture images and signatures, create badge designs, and print badges. If not all computers

require the license at the same time, you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate

computers.)

Thin client licenses are limited to Enterprise Server computers running Windows 2000/2003 operating

system. Licensing controls the number of computers that can host remote Secure Perfect sessions. You

cannot enable thin client on more computers than you have licenses. (If not all computers require the

license at the same time, you can enable and disable the option for the appropriate computers.)

To run the License program, click in this sequence: Start, Run, Programs, Secure Perfect, SP

License. The LicenseSetup window opens. Follow instructions as displayed. SP License has a separate

Online Help system.

Location Tab

Reference Topic:

Alarm Notifier

Person Form

Use this tab to enter location information for this person. The fields accept 64 alphanumeric characters,

making possible exceptionally lengthy street addresses or E-mail addresses.

Address1/Address2/ Address3/Address4/Address5

The labels of these five fields are defined on the Parameters Form.

Any fields can be used as an E-mail Address, but must first be designated as the E-mail address on

the Parameter Form, as a User Field or Address Field entry.

Telephone

Enter the telephone number of this person. You may use up to 14 alphanumeric characters. There are no

restrictions in format (whether you use hyphens, parentheses, or spaces). Enter in a format meaningful

and understandable to your organization or application.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

192

LogFile

Administration Menu

The LogFile option opens the LogFile Form that allows you to select the computer, name your log file,

and navigate to, or enter the path and directory to your LogFile.

LogFile Tab

Reference Topic:

Diagnostic Settings Form

LogFile Form

Click Add to create a new logfile record or Search to display a list box of previously created LogFiles.

Computer

This field will be unavailable when creating a new

record. The name of your computer will display in this

field.

LogFile

Name or identify your file.

You must enter an .splextension. Example:

COM1log.spl

Path

Designate the path and directory in which to place

your LogFile.

Browse

Click to display a Browse for Folder window, allowing

you to navigate to the directory in which to place your

LogFile.

Save. Now, open the Diagnostic Settings Form from the Administration menu. You will want to select this

LogFile name from the list of files displayed, and assign components for monitoring.

Logoff

File Menu Item

Low-Battery Alarm

Micro/PX-2000 ONLY: When you create and save a Micro/PX-2000 record, Secure Perfect creates and

supports 11 DI points; however, the 11^thDI is a low-battery alarm. To configure the 11^thDI to function as

a low-battery alarm, refer to DI Board Records Creation . If power is off and the backup battery is running

low, the micro sends an alarm transaction to the Alarm Monitor form. The alarm displays until the battery

is reset by recharging or the micro is powered back on.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

193

Manual Control

Operations Menu

The Manual Control option opens the Manual Control Form that allows you to control:

•

DO (digital output) states for Door DOs and other DOs.

DI (digital input) states for Alarm DIs and other DIs.

Intrusion Zone states.

The shortcut key combination for Manual Control Form is CTRL+O.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Manual Control Tab

Digital Output Form

Use this tab to manually set the state of a specified digital output.

Purpose

Enter the reason for manually changing the state of the specified digital output. The text entered here is

recorded in Operator History.

Set state to:

•

On for Duration: Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state for the On time

specified on the Digital Output tab.

•

On Indefinite: Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state until it is manually set

to its inactive state. The only way to turn it off is by selecting Off on this tab or Off on the

Manual Door/DO Control Form.

•

Off: Click to set the selected digital output to its inactive state.

Sched. Override: Use this option to change the state of the DO if you want the schedule to

override its setting. For example, use Sched. Override to unlock a door if you want a

schedule at a later time to lock this door. If you don’t want the scheduler to lock your door,

use the On Indefinite selection.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

194

Mass Update

Reference Topic:

Conditions of Mass Update

This option is not available until at least one record exists in the list box to the right of the form. The Mass

Update mode allows you to simultaneously update properties on a group of records within Secure

Perfect. This is very helpful when a number of records for a single form require the identical property or

value change. Forms where Mass Update is applicable include the Person Form and Badge Form.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Mass Update mode of processing is enabled as follows:

1. Open a blank form.

2. Click Search to display a list of existing records. We recommend entering search criteria to

narrow your search results to only records that are to be updated. Records that match your

search criteria display in the list box to the right of the form.

If there are no records, Mass Update is not available.

3. Move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and right-click to display a shortcut menu to

related forms. To enable the Mass Update mode, select Mass Update from the shortcut menu.

4. Note the change in the appearance of the form. ONLY those fields or dialog boxes that are

available for mass update changes are now enabled and blank. Certain conditions apply.

5. Select the records you want to adjust from the list box on the right. Typical Microsoft Windows

selection/deselection process is used in this application

6. Make the required adjustment to the form.

7. Click Save. The update of records begins immediately. A window displays with a progress bar,

indicating the update progress. Click Abort if you want to stop the update in progress.

ꢀYou cannot close a form during the Mass Update process.

Right-click shortcut menu navigation is unavailable when you are in Mass Update

mode.

ꢀIf you have changed any parameter but did not Save, a message reminds you to discard or

save your changes.

ꢀSmaller batch updates are recommended to prevent performance issues during a mass

update.

ꢀA Mass Update Complete dialog box displays, indicating completion or failure.

When mass updates are processed to an access right, a log file is generated and a

View Results key displays in the dialog box. Click to view the completion log. We

recommend that you rename and save this file to another location for reference purposes.

Renaming the log prevents an overwrite. The questionable log will be available for

Customer Support to review and locate discrepancies. Be aware that this log file is

automatically overwritten every 7 days, in order to prevent unnecessary data that would

accumulate on your hard drive.

8. When the process is complete, a Mass Update Complete dialog message displays.

9. Right-click and select Mass Update from the shortcut menu to disable and exit Mass Update

mode. The records refresh at this point.

10. Updates display in the list box to the right.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

195

Menu Buttons

View Menu

The Menu Buttons option determines whether or not the Secure Perfect graphics display beside options

in the drop-down menus.

Clear the check box to hide the graphics from view.

Message Format Tab

Alarm Notifier Form

This tab allows you to format the appearance of the e-mail alarm notification, based on your Windows

regional font settings.

Date/Time Format

Select a date/time format from the drop-down list.

Header

Select this check box to display a header greeting. In the Header field, enter text up to 256 alphanumeric

characters. This could be additional details explaining the alarm condition.

•

If you do not select the check box, any header message you create will NOT be included in

your e-mail.

•

If you do not enter a header greeting, an equivalent white space will display at the beginning

of the e-mail notification.

Footer

Select this check box to display a footer closing. In the Footer field, enter text up to 256 alphanumeric

characters. This space could provide a name and number to contact if the receiver has a question.

•

If you do not select the check box, any footer message you create will NOT be included in

your e-mail.

•

If you do not enter a foot or closing, an equivalent white space will display at the end of the e-

mail notification.

Alarm Information: The information displayed on the e-mail message may look similar to:

0151-1-01 DI|Alarm|10/16/02 15:20:59

where:

0151-1-01 DI=

Alarm

The micro, board and reader.

The alarm state.

10/16/01 15:20:59

The micro date and time.

Add Alarm Instruction

Select this check box to include the alarm instruction associated with this alarm, in this e-mail notification.

•

If this check box is not selected, any associated alarm instruction will not be included in the

message.

•

If this check box is selected and there are no alarm instructions, no instructions will be

included in the message.

Alarm/Reset Text

This text is how you want the alarm State to display to the receiver. You can do one of the following:

•

Accept the default alarm state entry, as displayed in the language of the current operator.

Select and replace the existing text with alarm state text in another language, such as the

language of the receiver. You can also add to the text with additional text (no more than 32

alphanumeric characters total) describing the state.

Alarm Text: Default alarm state text is Alarm, displayed in the language of the current operator.

Reset Text: Default alarm reset state text is Reset, displayed in the language of the current operator.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

196

Micro

Device Menu

The Micro option opens the Micro Form that allows you to identify and configure micros.

Micro/5-PX or Micro/PX-2000 Records Generation

When you select a micro type on the Micro Definition tab of the Micro Form, a Power/Comm board is

automatically added to the Configuration column on the Micro Configuration tab of the Micro Form. As a

result, certain additional records are created:

Alarm Records:

•

Tamper

Power

Lost Badge Alarm

Invalid Badge

Host Comm Alarm

8RP

Reminder: The Micro/PX-2000 supports 4 readers.

Reminder: The Micro/PX-2000 supports 8 DO points.

Reminder: The Micro/PX-2000 supports 11 DI points.

16DO

20DI

Micro/PX-2000 boards shipped after November 1, 2003, support the 11th DI as a low-battery

alarm for the micro.

None of these alarms are monitored. If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is

triggered, you will need to go to the Alarm Form, Alarm Tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section.

In addition, all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0. You can change the Alarm Group on

the Alarm Group Form.

Digital Input Records:

•

Tamper

Power

Sixteen (16) Alarm Group Records:

As mentioned above, all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0. You can change this on the

Alarm Group Form.

Micro Assignment Dialog Box

This window displays when you click Edit, allowing you to select and assign micro association for this

form. Only micros in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available micro.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a micro.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

197

Micro Configuration Tab

Reference Topics:

Micro/5-PX or Micro/PX-2000 Records Generation

Reader Board Records Generation

DO Board Records Generation

DI Board Records Generation

Micro Form

Use this tab to assign the appropriate boards to this micro.

Before continuing, verify that the micro type (Micro/5-PX, Micro/5-PXN, Micro/PX-2000, or Micro/PXN-

2000) is correct. The boards listed in the Boards column depend on the type of micro you have selected.

Boards

Lists all boards supported by Secure Perfect and the micro type you have selected. To add a board to the

current micro record, click and drag to the Configuration column. If the addition of the board violates a

micro configuration rule, you will get an error and the board will not be added.

Configuration

Lists the current configuration of the micro. A Power/Comm board is automatically added when you

create the micro record. The reader, digital input, and digital output boards will need to be added to

match the physical setup of the micro.

Following the addition or deletion of a board, you MUST click Save for the appropriate records to be

generated or deleted.

Once you add a board, you are restricted to that type of board only. For example, if you add one 2RP

board, any additional boards MUST be 2RP boards. Likewise, you cannot violate any micro configuration

rule. These are based on the capacities for each micro. For example, for the Micro/5-PX, you can only

add up to four 2RP boards, four 2SRP boards, two 4CRP boards, two 8RP boards, or two CK8RP

boards.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

198

Micro Definition Tab

Micro Form

Configure your system with forethought. You will need to designate a physical address for your micro

before you create a definition.

This tab contains the basic information on the micro, such as its address and connection type. When

configuring a micro, COMPLETE THIS TAB FIRST. Other tabs display, depending on the selections you

make on this form.

Upon creation, the micro is offline. Before the host will communicate with the micro, you must change it to

online using the Micro Utility Form. You will not see any badge or alarm transactions until this is done.

Element

Description

Enter a number from 1 to 9999 maximum.

Micro

Address

When micro records are created, the default value is in the format:

mmmm-b-ppBoard Type where mmmm represents the micro number to

which a reader is associated, b represents the board number, pp

represents the point or device number, and Board Type is the type of

reader board.

Example:

0001-1-01 Reader

Micro Type

Select the micro you are configuring from the drop-down list. Secure

Perfect operates with the following micro types:

•

Micro/5-PX (supports 16 readers) for direct serial and remote dial-

up modem communications links.

•

Micro/5-PXN (supports 16 readers) for 10/100Mb Ethernet

communications links. May also be used for direct serial and remote

dialup modem communication links.

•

Micro/PX-2000 (supports 4 readers) for direct serial and remote

dial-up modem communications links.

Micro/PXN-2000 (supports 4 readers) for 10/100Mb Ethernet

communications links. May also be used for direct serial and remote

dialup modem communication links.

•

MicroPXNPlus (supports 16 readers) for 10/100Mb Ethernet

communications links. May also be used for direct serial and remote

dialup modem communication links.

MicroPXNPlus2000 (supports 4 readers) for 10/100Mb Ethernet

communications links. May also be used for direct serial and remote

dialup modem communication links.

When you make a selection, the appropriate fields become available for

the selected type.

Head of Line

Once you have connected the first micro to the host, this micro is the

Head-of-Line in a string of micros.

•

Select Yes if you are configuring the first micro connected to the

host.

•

If you select No, you must also select a head-of-line micro from the

drop-down list.

A MicroPXNPlus or MicroPXNPlus2000 must be a head-of-line micro to

take advantage of the Web Integrated Configuration Tool for flashing the

firmware.

If this is a new board, the network settings are set as the default. Open a

browser window such as IE, enter the micro IP address (such as

http\\192.168.6.6)and click Go. Firmware download begins.

•

If a MicroPXNPlus or MicroPXNPlus2000 is downstream, you must

use eFlash to download firmware to any micro.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

199

•

If a MicroPXNPlus or MicroPXNPlus2000 is downstream, consider

obtaining a network connection and using the Web Integrated

Configuration Tool to individually download firmware for ALL

micros.

Connection

Type

You must select a micro type before this field becomes available. An

error message displays if the selected connection type is not valid with

the micro type.

•

Select Dial-up if this micro is connected by a modem.

Select Direct if a cable connects this micro.

Select Network if this is a network micro connected by a network.

Select Network + Dial-up if this is a network micro and has a

backup dial-up option. When the network connection is not

available, the host attempts to reach the micro via a dial-up modem.

Select Network + Direct if this is a network micro. When the network

connection is not available, communication fails over to the

secondary direct connection and communication continues.

Select Network + Network if this is a network micro. When the

network connection is not available, communication fails over to a

secondary network communication through another IP address,

assigned on the Port Settings tab.

•

Dial-Up and Network + Dial-Up Micros: If the host computer of this

micro is licensed for Client Redundancy and has assigned a backup

client, a dialog box displays, reminding you to complete the Client Form

by configuring telephone numbers for backup clients to reach this micro.

Host Keep

Alive

Type (or use the up and down arrows) the number of seconds that the

host will wait before sending the next message to a micro. Enter a

number between 10 and 3600. In general, you want a large number

when you have many micros on the same line or have a slow baud rate.

The default is 30 seconds and in most cases, it does not need to be

changed.

Host

Computer

Select the PC Name from the drop-down list. This is the host machine

that will communicate with the newly defined micro in the future and acts

as the micro communication server.

If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition, you cannot

re-assign this micro to any other Host computer except the Active Client

that is presently hosting this device.

Badge

Note that any time a badge that is not in a micro is presented to a

reader, it is reported as unknown and the host sends the badge to the

micro. This happens regardless of the Badge Loading option. The

micros can store only a limited number of badges. Refer to the

"Licensing Secure Perfect" chapter of the Secure Perfect Installation

Guide for capacities. When a previously unknown badge is sent to a

micro whose badge capacity is exceeded, the micro randomly chooses

a badge to delete to make room for the new badge. The badge is

deleted from the micro but not from the Secure Perfect system.

Select Force to force a download of all badges that can possibly gain

access to a reader on the micro.

Select Learn to allow the micro to "learn" the badges as they are

presented. For example, when a badge is presented to a reader and the

micro does not recognize the badge as valid, the micro communicates

with the host to confirm badge validity. If the badge is valid, the

information for that badge is downloaded to the micro; therefore, the

micro will acknowledge this badge as valid the next time the badge is

presented to the reader.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

200

Exit Request

Debounce

Enable this field to increase the sense time on all the Exit DIs (exit

requests). This field is useful if using noisy or chattering contact

interference in which you receive false exit requests.

Send Real

Time Digital

Output

When this checkbox is selected, any digital output change-of-state is

reflected on the Alarm Graphics Viewer, in real-time status. This activity

is also recorded in Digital Ouput History.

Status

Micro Flash and Micro Parameter Configuration

This dialog box displays only if the micro is online. There are three options:

•

View/Edit Parameter Info

Micro Parameter – Direct/Dialup: This option is available for selection of a single micro. When

selected, the Micro Parameter Configuration screen displays and the configuration for the micro is

retrieved, allowing you to edit or change an existing setup such as micro address, IP address change,

or phone number changes. Once saved, the micro will reset and the new changes take effect.

If you change parameter block data through Secure Perfect, any Universal Badge Format (UBF)

data will be erased.

For example: If a M/5-PXN was originally configured as a direct serial micro during installation but

will now be a network micro, select the updated micro type and complete the network information.

Click OK. The micro will accept the changes, reset, then change the host information for this micro.

The Micro Parameter – Direct/Dialup tab allows you to change the connection type of the micro and

its Address, Idle Time, and DI res tolerance.

The Micro Parameter – Networking tab will display only if the system identified your micro as a

network micro and allows you to change the network parameters for the micro.

Micro Parameter – Badge Format: This tab opens to display the custom badge formats that are

currently in the micro. If there are no custom formats, the fields are empty. If a format in the database

does not match what is available in the micro, the window list displays a message ‘Unrecognized

Format.’ To change the badge format:

ꢀ

Magnetic stripe: Select the type of magnetic stripe format from the drop-down list.

Wiegand: Click Assign formats to display a list of available Wiegand badge formats from which

to choose and assign to this micro.

ꢀ

Clear formats in micro: Click to clear all custom badge formats from the micro. Badges

associated with those formats will no longer work.

If you change the badge format, any format that existed in the micro previously is replaced.

•

Start Flashing Micro(s)

This option will start flashing the selected micro(s) with the latest firmware. A dialog box will display

asking you to verify your request. The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes; it

varies with amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the micro.

View/Edit Flash Files

Use this option ONLY when it is necessary to selectively flash an older version of firmware on a micro.

The Secure Perfect system automatically selects the latest version by default. The flashing process

takes approximately two to three minutes; it varies with amount of data that needs to be transmitted to

the micro. Click OK to begin the flash. When flashing is complete, the micro resets and requests a

database.

ꢀ

Micro/5 – PX and Micro/PX – 2000: The form opens with the latest .eflfirmware file

displayed. Click the drop-down list to display and select an older firmware file.

Micro/5 – PXN and Micro/PXN – 2000: The form opens with the latest .eflnetwork firmware

file displayed. Click the drop-down list to display and select an older network firmware file.

MicroPXNPlus and MicroPXNPlus2000: The form opens with the latest .eflnetwork

firmware file displayed. Click the drop-down list to display and select an older network firmware

file.

ꢀ

Browse: Click to navigate to another media source or directory where firmware files reside.

Override Block Checking: Ignore this checkbox. This selection is for Customer Support use

only.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

201

Version 4.XX and later mico firmware is able to communicate with a Secure Perfect 6.x host and

continue to send alarm and badge transactions. Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation

without loss of data, time constraints during the micro migration process, or lockdowns during the

database upgrade process. However, in order to take advantage of the new features that are dependant

on the SP 6.x firmware, the ultimate goal is to bring all micros to current level as soon as possible

following the database upgrade.

Micro Utility

Operations Menu

The Micro Utility option opens the Micro Utility Form that allows you to monitor communications, control

the micro, and flash the micro. The shortcut key combination for the Micro Utility Form is CTRL+U.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

202

Micro Utility Form Shortcut Menu

Reference Topic:

Flash Micro Icon

These options also display on the Micro Utility Form Toolbar. Refer to individual icons for additional

details of each function.

Select

Edit

Open the Micro Form and edit the settings for the selected micro.

Open the Micro Form and create a new micro.

Change the current state of the selected micro.

New

Set

Offline/Offline

Download

Badges

Reload the badge database records for the selected micro.

Download the micro’s database.

Download

Database

Reset Micro

Reset T&A

Physically reset the micro.

Set the time and attendance status to neutral for all badges in this

micro.

Reset APB

Set the anti-passback status to neutral for all badges in this micro.

Dial that micro immediately.

Dial/Hangup

Micro

Flash Micro(s)

Click to open the Micro Flash & Micro Parameter Configuration

window that allows you to download the latest firmware to the

selected micro.

Version 4.XX and later firmware is able to communicate with a

Secure Perfect 6.0 host and continue to send alarm and badge

transactions. Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation

without loss of data, time constraints during the micro migration

process, or lockdowns during the database upgrade process.

However, in order to take advantage of the new features that are

dependant on the SP 6.0 firmware, the ultimate goal is to bring all

micros to current level as soon as possible following the database

upgrade. Also,

Remove Micro(s)

Search Micros

Select Columns

Remove the micro from the Micro Utility Form window.

Display the Search Criteria and Micro Selection dialog box.

Display the Select Columns dialog box.

Recall Micro

Refills the current form with the last search criteria. This is a toggle

option.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

203

Micro Utility Form Toolbar

For a shortcut menu to functions available within the Micro Utility Form, select a micro from the list

and right-click.

For icon functionality on the Micro Utility Form toolbar:

Click

Download the latest firmware to the selected micro. When the Micro Flash & Micro

Parameter Configuration dialog box displays, click Start Flashing Micro(s).

Open the Micro Form and edit the settings for the selected micro.

Open the Micro Form and create a new micro.

Change the current state of the selected micro.

Download badge records for the selected micro.

Download database to the micro.

Physically reset the micro.

Set the time and attendance status to neutral for all badges in this micro.

Set the anti-passback status to neutral for all badges in this micro.

Dial/hang up that micro immediately.

Display the Select Columns dialog box.

Display the Search Criteria and Micro Selection dialog box, allowing you to search and

select micros that you want to display on the Micro Utility Form.

The first time the form is opened when there is more than 64 micros, a message will

display informing you of the number of micros about to display and ask if you want to

select search criteria.

Mode Labels Tab

Reference Topics:

Event Schedule Form

Time Schedule Form

Mode Schedule Form

Parameters Form

Use this tab to change the labels of modes. These labels are used in scheduling. Refer to the Event,

Time, and Mode Schedule Forms.

Mode 1/Mode 2/Mode 3

The default label displays. To change the label, select and enter over the existing text, up to 30

alphanumeric characters.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

204

Mode Schedule

Administration Menu

The Mode Schedule option opens the Mode Schedule Form that allows you to define a mode and assign

the date and time the mode goes into effect.

Mode Schedule Tab

Reference Topic:

Mode Labels Tab

Mode Schedule Form

Use this tab to create a mode schedule.

•

Time: The time displays in the format 00:00(hours:minutes). Select and retype over

existing time.

•

Date: Click the arrows to navigate through the months and years until the appropriate month

displays. Click the day on the calendar that this mode will begin.

•

Assigned micros: Displays the currently assigned micros for this operator.

Edit: Click to display the Micro Assignment dialog that allows you to add or change the

micros currently assigned. You must select all micros that this mode change will effect.

From: Select the mode the system must be in for this schedule to occur.

To: Select the mode the system will change to when this schedule occurs.

•

Like events, there is no end time associated with a mode. The mode will remain active until changed

by another mode schedule.

Mode schedules created on the Mode Schedule Form will display as schedule options on the Event

Schedule Form and Time Schedule Form.

Also, you can change the label of your modes on the Parameters Form, Mode Labels tab. (You must

restart the Secure Perfect program for any changes to the Parameters Form to take effect.)

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

205

Mode Tab

Reference Topics:

Parameter Form

Mode Schedule Form

Overview – Micro Utility Form

Manual Control Form

Select all or individual micros or clients for immediate change of mode.

Example: The change of mode for micros is helpful for an immediate "lockdown" or to open all doors

immediately. The change of mode for clients applies to alarm routing and bumping.

When you select this tab, a windowpane displays a list of available online micros or client groups in your

system, based on facility permissions for the current operator.

Element

Description

•

Micros: Select to display real time discription, current mode, and address of

online micros.

Select Display Type

•

Clients: Select to display real time current mode for configured Clients.

From the drop-down list, select one of the available modes to which you want to

change.

Set Mode to

•

The Current Mode status, as displayed in the list, refreshes automatically

following a change of mode (by schedule or manual control).

•

Updates for micros display in the Mode column of the Micro Utility Form.

Updates for clients display on the Client Monitor Form.

Apply Mode

Purpose

Click Apply Mode to send the command to the micro or client. Available modes

include Normal, Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3. (Modes are created and

labeled on the Mode Labels tab of the Parameter Form.)

Enter the reason for this change of mode. This box accepts 255 characters. This

comment is written to the operator history file and displays on the Operator

History Report.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

206

Multiple Language Support

Some items you should note about SP’s national language support:

•

English is the default language and is always installed.

The Windows operating system should be installed for the specific language chosen for SP. For

example, if running Secure Perfect Spanish, Windows Spanish should be installed.

•

Secure Perfect will start in the language of the operating system. For example, if Windows Spanish is

installed, Secure Perfect will start in Spanish.

Initially, there is only one operator provided with the system: an English language operator with the

under this operator. If the operating system is in a language other than English, there will be a slight

delay in bringing up the Secure Perfect main menu since the English help files must be copied into the

main directory.

•

To set up a different language operator, you must go to the Operator Form , and add an operator with

the desired language. A combo box on the operator form lists the available languages for the system.

A language must be selected prior to saving the operator’s record.

Multiple language logins are supported without having to restart the application. Log out of Secure

Perfect and log back in as the new operator. (There will be a slight delay in bringing up the Secure

Perfect main menu since the new language help files must be copied to the main directory.) Secure

Perfect along with the Help files will display in that operator’s language.

•

Any data entry done after the operator’s login will be in the operator’s language. For example, when

adding a micro, all the attached device descriptions will be in the operator’s language.

There are several areas in Secure Perfect that are not translated, such as certain Windows messages

and certain parts of the reporting functions.

If a particular language is not provided by GE Security, the installation will take place in English and

the Secure Perfect application will run in English.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

207

Networking

Secure Perfect requires that you set up a network protocol to allow the server and clients to

communicate. Secure Perfect uses the TCP/IP network protocol.

You will need to validate visibility and connectivity to the client and servers by name resolution. (Secure

Perfect uses PC Names only.) The following describes two ways to validate operations:

•

Envoking Ping: Select Start, then Run. At the Open field, type command. A DOS-like window opens.

At the prompt, type ping pcnamewhere pcnameis the name of the PC to which you are validating

visibility and connectivity. If you receive a response of an unknown host, you will need to re-examine

you TCP/IP configuration. If you receive a reply, the client/server is online and available for

connection.

•

Start, Run, PC Name: Select Start, then Run. At the Open field, type //pcnamewhere pcnameis

the name of the PC to which you are validating connection. If the connection is valid, you will see the

shared folders on the remote PC.

If you are using Token Ring and/or TCP/IP, you are encouraged to contact your system administrator

for local requirements and restrictions.

New Icon

Micro Utility Form

Click this graphic to open the Micro Form and create a new micro:

New Record

File Menu Item

The New Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data. This is the best way to

start or add a new record as the default data often saves you from entering in the data. The New Record

option is available only when a form is open, contains records, and you have been given permission to

update records.

Clicking this icon on the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

New Template Dialog

Use this dialog box to create a new template. You are prompted to enter the name of the template you

want to create. Keep in mind that any information currently on the report form will be saved under this

name.

Next Pane

View Menu

The Next Pane option moves the cursor between the main form, the tabs, and the search results window,

if there is one.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

208

No Alarms on Alarm Monitor

Go to the Alarm Form and click the Alarm tab. Make sure that the Monitor option is On. Also, check the

schedules. There may be one in effect that does not route certain alarms to the Alarm Monitor Form.

No Floor Tracking

With this method, you define the floors available and define a digital output for each floor. Only digital

outputs (DOs) provided by the 16 DO board can be used. In addition, each DO may be used in only one

elevator and mapped to only one floor. The number of floors is limited by the number of 16 DO boards

that can be placed in the Micro/5-PX; the maximum is 4. Therefore, the maximum number of floors

available is 64 (4 boards x 16 DOs = 64 DOs).

No Readers in List Box

Only readers assigned Active will be displayed in the list box. Go to the Reader Form and click the

Reader tab. Verify that the readers you are using are assigned Active.

Normal Type Reader

Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a micro connected to a normal reader.

1. Click the start key on the keypad. The start key is labeled with either an asterisk <*> or a plus <+>

depending on the reader model.

2. Type one of the following:

0 - to turn monitoring off

1 - to turn monitoring on

3. Type the alarm group number (00 to 15) you want shunted.

4. Click the end key which is labeled with either a pound sign (#) or an <x>.

5. Present a valid badge to the reader.

Notes

File Menu Item

The Notes menu option opens a text file, notes.txt,into which you can enter site-specific information.

The program used to edit this file is the program that has been associated with .txtfiles in Windows

(usually Notepad). The notes.txtfile is saved to your desktop by default.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

209

Operations Menu Selections

The following selections display in the Operations drop-down menu:

Alarm Graphics Editor

Alarm Graphics Viewer

Manual Control

Digital Output Status

Digital Video Viewer

Change Password

Select Facilities

Enable Alarm Video Pop-up

Operator

Administration Menu

The Operator option opens the Operator Form that allows you to set up individuals as users for the

Secure Perfect system and assign the facilities to which they have access.

Operator History

Reports Menu

The Operator History option opens the Operator History Report Form that allows you to create a report

based on the history of operator activity.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

210

Operator Tab

Reference Topics:

Permission Form

Multiple Language Support

Change Password

Password Tab

Operator Form

Use this form to create operator records that allow individuals to access the Secure Perfect program.

•

Name: Enter the name of the operator.

Permission: From the drop-down list of previously created permissions, assign a permission to ths

operator.

•

Language: Click the drop-down list to display a list of available languages installed on your system.

Select the language with which this operator accesses and operates the Secure Perfect system.

Secure Perfect Password Authentication

•

Password: Enter the password this operator will use to log in to Secure Perfect. This field accepts a

minimum of 1 and maximum of 20 digits. Additional password parameters were set on the Password

tab of the Parameter Form.

•

Confirm Password: Enter the password a second time exactly as entered in the Password field.

IMPORTANT: The assigned password cannot match any previous five passwords. Operator login

passwords are case sensitive. Because it is difficult to retrieve, it is important for operators to

remember their assigned password or write it down and store in a safe place.

•

Permission to Change Password: If this check box is selected, the operator indicated in this record

has the option to change the login password. If this checkbox is clear, the option to change the login

password is unavailable to this operator.

Expiration

•

Password never expires: If selected, the password assigned to the current operator will never expire.

If this checkbox is not selected, the two remaining fields are available.

•

Expires in (days): This field is not available if Password never expires is selected. From the drop-

down list of available time periods, select number of days that will pass before the password assigned

to the current operator expires. The selections are 30, 60, 90, 120, or 180 days.

•

Warn prior to expiration (days): This field is not available if Password never expires is selected.

Enter or select the number of days before the expiration of the operator’s password that a warning

message displays, indicating that the assigned operator password is about to expire. The number of

days in this field must be less than the number of days selected in the Expires in (days) field.

When this option is selected, a message displays when logging in to Secure Perfect, informing the

operator of the number of days until the password expiration is valid.

- Select Yes to change the password immediately.

- Select No to continue using Secure Perfect and change the password at a later time.

- If the password has expired, the operator can no longer log on.

- If the operator does not have permission to change the password, the operator is instructed to

contact the SP Administrator to change the password. These warnings are logged as operator history

transactions and can be retrieved by running a report on operator actions , using the System Operator

filter for Login Name .

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

211

Active Directory Password Authentication

If this option is available, Secure Perfect Password Authentication options will not be available. The

Active Directory domain controller authenticates this operator name and password. (The operator added

to Secure Perfect must be a valid operator in the domain computer.) The next time this operator logs in to

Secure Perfect, for this feature, the user must log in to the domain when logging into the computer, for

access to the Secure Perfect system. (The user cannot log in to the local computer; the user will log in to

the Domain.) Secure Perfect validates the user login ID and password against the specified Active

Directory, and not the Secure Perfect database. This authentication overrides any password parameters

entered through Secure Perfect.

• Browse: Click to display a list of Active Directory Domain Controller Servers. Select the Domain

Controller Server computer that will authenticathe the Secure Perfect operator, and controls the

users, passwords, and the Secure Perfect sytem to which you are assigning this operator. The

selected Server computer will authenticate this operator name and password. The selected Server

name now displays in this field.

Override

Administration Menu

The Override option opens the Override Form that allows an operator to configure persons and particular

readers for override, and generate Anti-Passback and Time and Attendance transactions that can be

added to history or archive databases.

Override Tab

Use this tab to set up the badge transaction that you want to enter into history.

Person: Select a person from the drop-down list.

Badge: Select a badge from the drop-down list of badges currently in the database.

The current time and date are displayed by default.

•

Time: Enter a time.

Date: Use the Calendar button to enter a date.

Calendar: Click to display the Calendar dialog.

Reader Type: Select a reader type.

Reader: Select a reader from the drop-down list of available readers for assignment by the current

operator.

Update Micro: Enable this field if you want to send this transaction to the micro.

Database Selection:

Generate: Click this button to enter the transaction into history. Select either Secure Perfect History

database or Secure Perfect Archive database.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

212

Parameters

Administration Menu

The Parameters option opens the Parameters Form that allows you to establish settings for your entire

Secure Perfect system such as archive intervals and appropriate modems.

Password Tab - Parameter Form

Parameter Form

This tab allows you to select the parameters for passwords used on the Secure Perfect system.

•

Minimum Length (characters): This field accepts 1 to 20 characters.

Cannot begin with a numeric character

Cannot end with a numeric character

Must be mixed case (contain both upper and lower case characters)

Must contain both alpha and numeric characters: If selected, this option enables the Minimum numeric

characters contol field.

•

Minimum numeric characters: The range for this selection is 1 to 19 characters with at least 1 alpha

character.

If the current operator has permission to change their password, the parameters selected here display in

the Change Password window as reminders.

Pause Button

This option pauses or suspends the scrolling of badge transactions on the Activity Monitor Form.

Clicking this icon from the Activity Monitor Form toolbar will access this option:

PDF Files and Adobe Acrobat Reader

Portable Document Files (PDFs) are read-only electronic versions of printed documents. The Secure

Perfect documents are in PDF format and included on a separate document CD.

Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view these documents. It is also included on the CD. If you do not

already have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed, follow the steps below:

1. Copy the file ar500enu.exefrom CD-ROM onto your hard drive.

2. Navigate to Windows Explorer and double-click ar500enu.exe.

3. Follow the on-screen installation instructions.

To view the PDF file, double-click the file name or start Adobe Acrobat Reader and open the document

you want to view. For additional information, refer to Adobe Acrobat Reader online Help.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

213

People Assignment

This window displays a list of Person Records with an e-mail address in the Secure Perfect system. Only

person records in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, then click the right arrow to assign an available person.

Select, then click the left arrow to unassign a person.

Permission

Administration Menu

The Permissions option opens the Permission Form that allows you to set access or right to use various

forms within your Secure Perfect system.

Permission Tab

Assigning a Level of Permission.

The forms in Secure Perfect will display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned

to this operator. The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here.

The information in Forms windowpane can be viewed one of two ways.

Forms

1. If a + displays to the left of the form name, then additional items are available. Click + to display

additional forms. You can also double-click the Forms: menu item to view the additional forms.

2. Right-click on the windowpane to display the shortcut menu with these options.

ꢀ

Show by Action lists the actions (None, Read, Update, All) followed by the forms assigned to

them.

ꢀ

Operator displays the Operator Form, which shows permissions assigned to existing

operators.

Actions

Four types of actions can be assigned:

None means that no access is given to that form.

Read means that read only access is given. The form and the associated records can be viewed

but not modified.

Update means that the records on that form can be viewed and modified.

All means that the records on that form can be viewed, modified and deleted.

Mixed is not an action to be assigned. It is used only on this form to signal that any forms beneath

a general title have different actions assigned.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

214

Example:

If you want an operator to monitor alarm and badge activity, select the Operation Forms, then set the

following actions:

•

Select Activity Monitor, then select Read.

Select Alarm Monitor, then select the action Read.

Select Manual Control, then select Update. (Selecting Update for Manual Control allows the

operator to manually change the DO state.)

•

Select Digital Output Status, then select Read.

On the Personnel Forms, set up actions to allow the new permission to add persons and badges into the

database.

•

Select Person, then select Update

Select Badge, then select Update.

For a shortcut menu to related forms, move the mouse pointer below the tab and click the right

mouse button.

Person

Personnel Menu

The Person option displays the Person Form that allows you to enter a person record into the system.

You will enter information such as the name and address, assign access rights for access control, assign

a department or user fields, and capture a photo. The shortcut key combination for Person Form is

CTRL+P.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Person

Reports Menu

The Person option displays the Person Report Form that allows you to create a report on the people in

the database.

Person Selection Tab

Alarm Notifier Form

The Person Selection tab allows you to assign people available in this operators’ facility that will receive

an e-mail notification of the alarm/reset condition.

Assigned People:

Click Assign People to display the People Assignment window, allowing you to select specific people

that will receive an e-mail alarm notification.

Only those with an e-mail address in their Person Record will display in the People Assignment list for

assignment to an alarm notification.

Click OK and the selected people names will display in the Assigned People windowpane of the Person

Selection window.

Save the new or modified Alarm Notifier record before you exit the form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

215

Personnel Menu Selections

The following selections display on the Personnel drop-down menu:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

216

Personnel Tab

Reference Topic:

Settings Tab, Parameter Form

Person Form

Create a record of an employee’s personal information.

Only Last Name, Personnel Type, and Employee Number are required fields.

Field

Action

First name

Enter the first name of the person.

Enter the middle name of the person

Enter an additional name, such as another middle name, of the person.

Middle name 1

Middle name 2

Initials, as displayed in the list box on the right, are the result of the

first letter of the First name and the first letter of each Middle name

entered.

Employee number

Enter a number assigned to and identifying this employee such as the

employee’s social security number. This is a required field and the

record will not save if the Empoyee number is left blank or if the number

is not unique to Secure Perfect. The field accepts up to 12 alphanumeric

characters.

CONVERSIONS ONLY: During the process of converting a

database, the system checks for possible blank or duplicate employee

numbers in the database. Results of this check display on the

Administration menu, Parameter Form. Open the form to display the

Settings tab:

•

If the Enable unique & required Employee Number check box is

selected and unavailable, all converted Person records have unique

employee numbers. All future Person records must have a unique

employee number before the record can be saved.

•

If the Enable unique & required Employee Number check box is NOT

selected, this is an indication that duplicate or blank employee

number records exist in the database.

At this time, you have the option to choose one of two preferences:

ꢀ

Do nothing and continue to allow blank or duplicate employee

numbers in Person records (the Enable unique & required

Emplyee Number check box remains clear).

ꢀ

Set a control that requires all Person records to have an entry in

the Employee number field.

If you choose to require all Person records to have a unique

employee number, select Enable unique & required Employee

Number.

1. A message displays informing you: The Employee number

field on the Person Form will be required and unique. Once

this is enabled, it cannot be changed back. Do you want to

continue with this change? Click Yes.

2. A second message displays: Could not enable unique and

required Employee number. Duplicates already exist or field

is empty in the database. Refer to the Diagnostic Logfile.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

217

3. Navigate to the logfile. A message informs you that Secure

Perfect generated a text file and placed the file in the Logsfolder

of the Secure Perfect Server. Navigate to

SecurePerfect\Logs\ DuplicateEmployeeNumbers.txt

file, consult the list of duplicate or blank employee numbers,

locate those Person records, and assign a unique employee

number to each.

4. When all records on the .txtfile list have a unique employee

number, return to the Parameter Form, select the Enable unique

& required Employee Number check box, and Save. If you

cannot save and again receive additional messages, you must

repeat the steps above.

5. The selection to require all Person records to have a unique

employee number cannot be reversed and all newly added

Person records must have a unique employee number.

Personnel type

Department

Select the appropriate personnel type from the drop-down list.

Select the appropriate department from the drop-down list.

Trace activity

Select to enable this field if you want a record of all activity on this

badge. Each time this badge is used, a message displays on the Activity

Monitor and a record is written to the history database. If the system has

a printer association, the message is printed. This field overrides the

routing of activity as defined on the Reader Form.

We do not recommend activating the trace function at a site that

uses dial-up micros. A micro will dial the host whenever a traced badge

is read. This may incur additional telephone costs.

Extended Unlock

Time

Select to enable this field. This person is now allowed extra time to gain

access to an entry or exit point in the Secure Perfect system. A popup

message asks you if you want to change all associated Badge records

to follow Extended Unlock Time. If you select Yes, all badges for that

person are changed to Follow Extended Unlock Time, as configured on

the Door Functions tab of the Reader Form .

Example: An extended time limit can be configured for an employee

who enters a motorized door by wheelchair.

Find and Assign

Badge

Click to find the next badge presented to a selected reader. Select any

active reader. If the badge is not in Secure Perfect, you can add it. This

is a convenient way to assign badges.

Personnel Type

Personnel Menu

The Personnel Type option opens the Personnel Type Form that allows you to create groupings of

employees and assign a badge design to the personnel type.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

218

Personnel Type Tab

Personnel Type Form

Use this form to create personnel types and assign a default badge design to each personnel type. Click

Search to display a list of existing types. Three personnel types come standard with SP: Permanent,

Contractor, and Temporary. Click Add to create additional types of your own.

Description

Enter a basic description of the personnel type.

Badge Design

Select a default badge design from the drop-down list of available designs. The design you select will

print whenever badges are sent to the printer for people assigned the current personnel type.

Badge designs are created on the Badge Design Form. If you do not want the badge to imprint the

default design, the design can be changed when the badge is printed.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

219

Photo Tab

Reference Topic:

Image Capture Overview

Person Form

This tab allows you to capture images, assign badge design layouts, and print badges.

Field

Action

Photo

If there is a photo associated with this person

record, it will display here.

Taken

Date this photo was captured.

Capture

Image/Signature

Click to run the Capture program, allowing you to

capture an image or signature of this person.

Badge

Displays the Descriptions of badges assigned to this

person, as assigned on the Badge Form.

If a printer is configured for your system, you can

select a badge to print.

Badge Design

Displays the name of the current badge design.

Click the drop-down list to select a different badge

design.

If there is a printer configured for your Secure

Perfect system, click to print a badge for this

person.

Signature

If there is a signature capture associated with this

person record, it will display here.

Point Assignment Dialog Box

This window displays when you click

points to a tour.

, enabling you to select and assign tour

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available point.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a point.

A DI start point can exist in only one tour; therefore, any DIs previously assigned as Start

Tour Point in any tour, will not display in the list. The DI point cannot be re-used.

All tour points must be associated with micros within the same Region .

Tour points can be readers or DIs that are not on a dial-up micro:

1) If a reader is selected as the start point, DIs not assigned to a tour, display in this list.

2) DI points can only be assigned to one tour.

•

3) Reader tour points can be assigned to any tour and any number of tours. A reader as a

tour point can be re-used.

•

The number of points assigned to a tour is limited to 64.

If any reader is assigned as a tour point, at least one badge must be assigned to the tour.

If all tour points are DIs, you do not need to assign a badge to the tour.

Click OK to display the results in the Tour Points windowpane.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

220

Port Settings Tab

Micro Form

This tab displays only when you are configuring a micro type as direct-connect, network, network +

direct, or network + network micro type. Refer to the Connection type figure below:

Direct Configuration

COM port:

You will be able to change this setting ONLY if the micro connection type is direct-connect or network +

direct. Otherwise, this field is unavailable. From the drop-down list, select the COM port to which this

micro is connected. The system operates with the default setting of None if no port is designated.

NETWORK CONFIGURATION

Primary Network (you must complete ONE of the following two selections):

These fields are available ONLY if the micro is other than a direct-connect or dial-up micro.

IP Address: Select this option and then enter the IP address for network configuration.

Network Name: Select this option and then enter the network name for the micro that hosts this micro.

Secondary Network (you must complete ONE of the following two selections):

IP Address: Select this option and then enter the secondary IP address assigned for network + network

communications.

Network Name: Select this option and then enter the secondary network name for the micro that hosts

this micro.

Preset/Camera Selection

Select or change an already defined camera from the drop-down list, then select or change a Preset from

the Preset drop-down list. Click OK to display in the results in the Assigned Preset/Camera windowpane.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

221

Preset/Camera Tab

Event Trigger Form

This window enables you to assign camera(s) and their associated presets with an event. Up to four

cameras can be assigned per event trigger.

•

Click Edit to display the Preset/Camera Selection window. You are able to edit an existing

Preset and Camera combination associated with this Event. This option is disabled if there

are no existing records.

Click Add to select a camera and corresponding preset. The available presets for a camera

display after you select the camera. Click OK. The addition now displays in the Assigned

Preset/Camera box.

Select then click Remove to remove a Preset and Camera combination from the list of

available combinations in the Assigned Preset/Camera box. This option is disabled if there

are no existing records.

Presets Tab

Camera Form

This tab is unavailable for fixed cameras. Presets are assignable to PTZ cameras only. Assign predefined

presets for the selected camera.

The Presets tab allows you to assign previously defined presets to a camera. (Presets must first be

defined on the Camera Preset Form.) Presets are assignable to only the PTZ cameras types.

Assigned Presets:

This windowpane displays a list of already assigned presets.

Assign Camera Presets: Click this button to display the Camera Preset Assignment dialog box. A list of

available camera presets displays, enabling you to select and assign or unassign one or more presets for

the selected camera.

When the Camera Preset Assignment form closes, the selected presets display in the Assigned Presets

windowpane. Click Save to save the selections.

Print Preview Report

File Menu

The Print Preview Report option allows you to preview before printing and is available only when a

Report Form is displaying. Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report Form, click to

preview a copy of your report. A printer must be added to your Secure Perfect system in order for this

feature to be available.

On the Preview Report screen, the Total: field represents the number of records in the database and

not the number of records that matched your search criteria. The zoom % value will always read 100%

regardless of the zoom used.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access the option:

Print Report

File Menu

The Print Report option allows you to send the current report to a defined printer. This option is available

only when a Report Form or Report is displaying.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

222

Print Setup

Reference Topics:

Print Setup Window

Installing the Printer Driver

File Menu

Select Print Setup to open the Print Setup Window, allowing you to select your printer, printer properties,

paper source, and orientation.

Print Setup

Select an available printer from the drop-down list and set properties.

Select paper size and source.

Select orientation as portrait or landscape.

If you are connecting to a network printer, click Network to navigate to the printer.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

223

Read and Keypad-Type Reader

Only reader board door inputs and 20DI board input points can be shunted from a keypad. (To

identify a reader board door input, look for a default description that follows this format: 0001-1-01

Reader. To identify a 20DI board input point, look for a default description that follows this format: 0001-

1-01 DI.)

Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a micro connected to a keypad and badge reader:

1. Click the start key on the keypad. The start key is labeled with either an asterisk <*> or a plus <+>

depending on the reader model.

2. Type one of the following:

0 - to turn monitoring off

1 - to turn monitoring on

3. Type the alarm group number (00 to 15) you want shunted.

4. Click the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign (#) or an <x>.

5. Present a valid badge to the reader.

6. Click the start key on the keypad again.

7. Type your Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the keypad.

8. Click the end key (<#> or <x>).

Reader

Device Menu

The Reader option opens the Reader Form that allows you to modify records that are automatically

generated when you define a micro as well as configure door functions, routing, schedules, and events.

Reader Access

Reports Menu

The Reader Access option opens the Reader Access Report Form that allows you to create a report

based on persons in the Secure Perfect system that have access to any of the specified readers.

Reader Assignment

This window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers, enabling you to select and assign a

reader association. Only readers in the operators’ facilities are available for assignment by this operator.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader.

Click OK to display results in the Assigned Readers windowpane.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

224

Reader Board Records Generation

The reader boards listed in the Boards column on the Micro Configuration tab depend on the Micro Type

you selected on the Micro Definition tab of the Micro Form. When you add a reader board (2RP, 2SRP),

certain records are automatically created:

Reader records:

•

If adding a 2RP or 2SRP board, two reader records are generated. By default, these readers

are active and able to accept badge transactions. Readers marked as Active count against

your reader limit.

Alarm records:

•

An alarm record is generated for each reader record. If you selected Supervised when you

added the board, an additional alarm record is generated for each reader called Supervised

Reader. If you are adding a 2SRP board, you will receive an additional alarm record for each

reader called Supervised Exit.

•

None of these alarms are monitored. If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when

the alarm is triggered, you will need to go to the Alarm Form, Alarm Tab and enable Monitor

in the Settings section.

In addition, all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0. To change this, go to the

Alarm Group Form.

Digital input records:

•

A digital input record is generated for each reader record.

Digital output records:

•

If you added a 2RP or 2SRP board, a digital output record called Aux DO is generated for

each reader record. (There are 2 DO relays available on a 2RP board.)

Reader Button

This option displays a reader assignment dialog box allowing you to configure readers to be used with the

Swipe and Show program. If Imaging is not licensed for the system, this option is not available.

•

Select, and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader.

Select, and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader.

Clicking this icon from the Activity Monitor Form toolbar will access this option:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

225

Reader/Digital Output Tab

Manual Control Form

Manually lock or unlock doors and turn on or off DO (digital output) points, depending on the current

operator’s facilities and permissions .

Schedules override manual changes unless Indefinite Unlock has been selected. Micros will always

run schedules defined previously in its database. Therefore, if there was a schedule set to be in effect at

the current time, the manual change would be overridden and the schedule would be enforced.

Select micro

A micro must be selected before the system searches and displays results in the list box.

•

All displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type, found on all micros.

By Micro displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type, found on a

selected micro. Click the drop-down list to display a list of micros.

Select DO type

•

If you select Reader, the windowpane displays the DO points available for the readers.

If you select Other, the windowpane displays Aux DOs (the two 2 DO relays available on a 2RP

board) and other DO points. Example DO points include lights, sirens, and door strikes that may be

connected to the micro.

Columns in Windowpane

•

Description: Description of the reader/DO in the database.

Micro: Micro on which the reader/DO is located.

On Time: Displays the On Time in the database. The On Time is the number of seconds this DO

remains in the active state when activated.

Set state to:

The names of the buttons change depending on the DO type (Reader or Other) selected.

If Reader is selected, click. . .

•

Duration Unlock: To unlock the selected door for the time specified in the On Time column.

Lock: To immediately lock the selected door.

Indefinite Unlock: To unlock the selected door. It will remain unlocked until you manually lock it by

clicking lock.

•

Sched. Override: To change the state of a door or DO, if you want a schedule to override its setting.

Example: Use Sched. Override to unlock a door if you want a schedule at a later time to lock this door.

If you don’t want the scheduler to lock your door, use the Indefinite Unlock selection.

If Other is selected, click. . .

•

On For Duration: Activates the selected DO for the time specified in the On Time column.

Off: Immediately deactivates the selected DO.

On Indefinite: Activates the selected DO, which will remain active until you manually turn it off by

clicking Off.

•

Sched. Override: Use this option to change the state of a DO if you want a schedule to override its

setting.

Purpose

Enter an explanation for locking/unlocking doors or activating/deactivating DO points. This field accepts

255 alphanumeric characters. These comments are written to the operator history file and display on the

Operator History Report, Purpose Field.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

226

Reader Tab

Reference Topics:

Read and Keypad-Type Reader

Keypad Only Type Reader

Normal Type Reader

Reader Form

This tab contains the basic information about the reader.

Element

Micro

Description

This is a read-only field. The description of the micro that controls this reader.

Board

This is a read-only field. The default description is in the format: mmmm-b Board

Typewhere mmmmrepresents the micro number to which this reader is associated, b

represents the board number, and Board Typerepresents the reader board.

For example, 0001—1 8RPwould be the reader on micro one, 8RP board one.

Number

Model

This is a read-only field. The number of the reader (For a Micro/5-PX: 1 to 16; for a

Micro/PX-2000: 1 to 4). The number corresponds to where the reader is connected on

the micro. See the Micro/5 Installation Guide or Micro/PX-2000 and Micro/PXN-2000

Installation Guide for more information.

There are three options; select:

•

CASI-RUSCO Supervised if using a CASI-RUSCO supervised reader such as the

94x or 97x series proximity readers set for supervised F/2F.

CASI-RUSCO 440/445 if using a CASI-RUSCO Model 440, Model 445, or Model

910.

Other if using a reader that does not fit into the above categories.

Status

Online: This field is automatically enabled when this reader record is created. An

online reader will accept a valid card read and unlock a door, provided it is one of the

licensed active readers. You also have the option to schedule a reader off-line. When

the reader is off-line, the reader will not accept valid card reads, will not unlock a door,

and transactions display on the Activity Monitor as Invalid.

Active: This field is automatically selected and allows the accepting of badge

transactions when this reader record is created. The number of active readers counts

against your reader limit, as defined by your software license. For example, if your

license key allows the use of 64 readers, you may have only 64 readers marked as

Active.

Physical

type

Normal: This reader requires only a valid badge to gain access.

Badge and Keypad: This reader requires a valid badge and a valid number (PIN)

entered on the keypad to gain access.

Badge or Keypad: This reader requires you to enter either a valid badge number on

the keypad or a valid badge to gain access.

Logical type

•

Normal: Allows as many successive accesses as needed, as long as the badge

is valid.

APB in: Anti-passback in. This type of reader (which gives an IN status) is used

to enter an area. This reader will not release a door a second time until that

badge is presented to an APB out reader connected to the same micro or, if you

selected Enable global APB on the Settings Tab of the Parameters Form, a

different micro. All micros are updated.

•

APB out: Anti-passback out. This type of reader (which gives an OUT status) is

used to leave an area. This reader will not release a door a second time until that

badge is presented to an APB in reader connected to the same micro or, if you

selected Enable global APB on the Settings Tab of the Parameters Form, a

different micro. All micros are updated.

Secure Perfect Global Edition: You must configure this reader as APB if you

plan to include this reader in a Region APB configuration. Only designated APB

reader types display for selection on the Region Form .

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

227

•

T&A in: Time & Attendance in. This type of reader (which gives an IN status) is

used to enter an area. This reader will not release a door a second time until that

badge is presented to a T&A out reader connected to the same micro or, if you

selected Enable global T&A on the Settings Tab of the Parameters Form, a

different micro.

T&A out: Time & Attendance out. This type of reader (which gives an OUT status)

is used to leave an area. This reader will not release a door a second time until

that badge is presented to a T&A in reader connected to the same micro or, if you

selected Enable global T&A on the Settings Tab of the Parameters Form, a

different micro.

In required: This type of reader will open the door only if the badge presented

currently has an IN status. For example, if you had a badge with a status of OUT

and attempted to gain access through a reader that was marked as In required,

the door would not open.

•

Elevator: This type of reader is used for elevator control. This is set up using the

Elevator Tab of the Elevator Form.

T&A In/Out: Time & Attendance In/Out. This type of reader is used ONLY for

Wiegand Swipe Readers, such as the Model 100.

To get an IN status, hold the badge so that the front of the badge is facing you.

(The logo is usually printed on the front of the badge.) Then swipe the badge

through the reader.

To get an OUT status, turn the badge around so that the back of the badge is

now facing you. Swipe the badge through the reader.

•

Passive APB and T&A: If you are using an anti-passback (APB) reader or time

and attendance (T&A) reader, enable this field for the reader to function as a

Normal type reader thereby allowing any valid badge to unlock the door

regardless of the badge’s IN/OUT status. However, the badge’s status will still be

logged as IN or OUT according to the reader used and will be recorded as such

in the badge history. Use this if you want to record APB or T&A without

preventing unauthorized persons from accessing doors.

APB and

T&A

Settings

Example: Timing begins when a badge is presented to an IN reader. Until that

time expires, the user cannot enter again regardless whether they went through

an OUT reader. If a user tries to go through the IN reader a second time, the

micro sends an invalid Timed APB message to the host.

Timed APB (min): This field is enabled when you select a Logical type as ‘APB

in.’ The default of this field is ‘0.’ Enter a number between 0 and 255.

•

Max Invalid PIN Count: 1) Select this checkbox if you want your Secure Perfect

system to suspend badges after an invalid PIN is entered and a badge is

presented at a reader a configured number of times. 2) Then, enter a number

between 1 and 6 as the number of times an invalid PIN code is entered at a

system reader before the badge is suspended. The default of this field is ‘3.’ 3) If

suspended, the badge must be changed to active by a system administrator.

Keypad PIN

If the Parameter Form is set to grant access on duress, access will be granted

and the badge transaction will display as Valid Duress. If the Parameter Form is not

set to grant access on duress, the door will not open and the transaction will be

Invalid Duress. If set to monitor, an alarm will be generated in both instances.

Enable

‘Valid No

Passage’

Select this checkbox if you want your Secure Perfect system to notify you when a

valid badge read occurs but the door did not open within the configured unlock time.

This may be an indication of someone deciding not to pass through the door, or an

accidental read as someone passes a reader.

•

This feature must be associated with an alarm type of door forced or door held in

order to be notified of a change in state of the door.

In order to notify of a duress situation, Grant Access on Duress must be

configured.

•

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

228

Reader Type Events Tab

Reader Form

Use this tab to select the events that will be used to determine when a reader will be used as a Normal,

Badge/Keypad, or Keypad reader.

Events define start time(s) and day(s) only. There is no end associated with an event. Therefore, that

event will stay in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually.

•

Normal: Select an event from the drop-down list. This reader will then be used as a Normal

reader beginning at the time and day given by the event.

Badge/keypad: Select an event from the drop-down list. This reader will then be used as a

Badge/keypad reader beginning at the time and day given by the event.

Keypad: Select an event from the drop-down list. This reader will then be used as a Keypad

reader beginning at the time and day given by the event.

Readers Tab

Reference Topic:

Activity Monitoring Using the Activity Monitor Form

Event Trigger Form

Select reader(s) and transaction type(s) that will become the source for initiating the Event Trigger.

Assigned Readers:

This pane displays readers assigned to this Event Trigger record.

Element

Description

Assign

Readers

Click to display a Reader Assignment window, enabling you to

select and assign a reader to this Event Trigger.

Transactions

Select any or all of the options as types of reader transactions to

trigger an event.

Valid

Invalid

Unknown

Lost

Tag Selection

Select one of the Tag options.

None (No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video or

manipulating record rate.)

Tag only (A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video at

the camera(s) current record rate.)

Tag as event (A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded

video and for changing the camera(s) record rate to its event

record rate settings.)

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

229

Readers Tab - Reports

Reader Access Report or Roll Call Report

Use this tab to select specific readers that will form the basis of information for this report.

This windowpane displays the list of readers that currently apply to this report. If there are no readers

listed, click Edit to display a Reader Assignment dialog box, allowing you to select and add readers.

Readers Tab - Time and Attendance History Report Form

Use this tab to select the readers you would like to use for this report. The windowpane displays the list of

readers that currently apply to this report. If there are no readers listed, click Edit to display the Reader

Assignment dialog that allows you to add readers.

Recall Search

Search Menu

The Recall Search option refills the current form with the last search criteria data. Use this option when

you want to recall the last search criteria. The option does not conduct a search or affect any data in the

database. The Recall Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Recorded Video Currently Being Accessed

When attempting to retrieve a recorded video event from SP, you may receive this message. You will not

be able to access recorded video events while the DVR is currently serving another request for playback.

Records Generation

Reference Topics:

Micro/5 or Micro/PX-2000 Records Generation

Reader Board Records Generation

DI Board Records Generation

DO Board Records Generation

You can configure your micro record to match the micro’s physical board configuration. Only those

records that are needed are configured. Refer to the Reference Topics for details and lists of records

generated when the board/micro is added:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

230

Region

Reference Topic:

Time and Attendance History

Administration Menu

The Region option opens the Region Form that allows you to assign synchronization intervals for your

Global Edition database replication.

This option is unavailable if you are not licensed for Global Edition software.

Region Form Tab

Region Form

Use this tab to identify a Global Database Server or Regional Database Server, and configure

synchronization intervals. This tab also contains the licensing information about the Region.

Global Server

If the selected server name:

•

Is a Global Database Server, a Yes displays in the Global Server field. Synchronization

interval fields are unavailable for input. You can assign synchronization intervals on Regional

Database Servers only.

•

Is a Regional Database Server, a No displays in the Global Server field. Synchronization

interval fields are available for input.

ꢀ

The synchronization processing time is dependent on how much data needs to be

synchronized and the performance of your system.

Using Windows, we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within

your Secure Perfect Global Edition system.

SP Database Synchronization Interval (min):

This database contains configuration data relating to badges and micros. The default and minium number

of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes. The maximum number of minutes is

1440 (once per day).

SP History Database Synchronization Interval (min):

This database contains current history including badge transactions and operator history. The default and

minimum number of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes. The maximum

number of minutes is 1440 (once per day).

REMINDER: A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated. It

defines what publication will be received, where, and when. The time that it takes to complete this

process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be

synchronized.

License Info:

This list informs the operator of the current licensing capabilities of the selected Region.

Example: This information is helpful to an operator when attempting to add an additional feature to a

Region. A message may display, informing the operator that addition of the feature is in excess of the

license limit for that Region. The operator consults this form to review the license capabilities. If limits for

that feature have been reached, additional devices cannot be added at this time.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

231

Remove All Button

Alarm Monitor Form Toolbar

Click this icon on the toolbar to remove all alarms on the Alarm Monitor regardless of whether the alarms

are acknowledged or unacknowledged. An operator must have an ALL permission for the Alarm Monitor

in order to have access to this icon.

Remove Individual Button

Alarm Monitor Form Toolbar

Click this icon on the toolbar to remove one or more alarms without waiting for them to reset. The

alarm(s) can be unacknowledged and cleared as long as it was not defined on the Alarm Form as

requiring an acknowledgment. Select a series of alarms in sequence or individual alarms not in

sequence.

Replication and Synchronization Conflicts

Conflicts with Secure Perfect replication are rare but can occur. A conflict occurs whenever two users in

different regions simultaneously update a field on an individual record; or update a record at a Global

Database Server computer and a Regional Database Server computer during synchronization.

For example:

Region 1 revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 5544 SW 8th St.

Region 2 revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 6544 SW 8th St.

There are now two different values in the same field of the same records in two different regions. Each

region’s scheduled SQL Server Merge Agent will activate the merge process and the changes will be

sent to the Global Server.

•

If both updates arrive at the Global Server during the same synchronization process, the SQL

Server will detect which update arrived first and that update will be successful.

If the update at Region Two arrived before the update at Region One during the same

synchronization process, then Region Two’s update will be successful. The address will be

updated to 6544 SW 8th Street on both Region One and Region Two. Keep in mind that

conflicts can only occur during the same synchronization process.

•

When the Global Server and Regional Server are connected and synchronization occurs, the

SQL Server Merge Agent detects conflicts and then determines which data will be accepted

and propagated to other sites based on the first record to successfully reach the Global

Server.

1. The synchronization processing time is dependent on how much data needs to be

synchronized and the performance of your system.

2. Using Windows, we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within

your Secure Perfect Global Edition system.

3. When re-assigning devices such as micros or DVRs across regions, you must stop and

restart services, first on the original owner of the devices and then on the computer to which

the devices are newly assigned. You must allow sufficient time for data replication to

complete across all affected regions before restarting services on the newly assigned

computer. Verify that devices are online and operable following the re-assignment.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

232

Report Templates Window

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

A list box displays a list of available templates. To use, select the desired template and do one of the

following:

Click to close this window without taking any action.

Save As

Select a template, and then click to save with a new name. A dialog box displays, enabling you to enter a

name for the new template.

Save

Select a template and click to save any changes made to the template parameters. An update message

will display.

Remove

Select a template, and then click to delete it from the list. A Delete Template dialog box displays to

confirm you choice and the template is deleted.

Make Default

Select a template, and then click to automatically load this template whenever this form is opened. A

Default Template confirmation message displays.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

233

Reports Menu Selections

The following selections display on the Reports drop-down menu:

Operator History

Guard Tour History

External Reports

Reset Micro

This causes the micro to empty its database and stored history. When the reset is complete, the micro

will request a new database and, if it is configured for forced badge downloading, the micro will also

receive a new badge database.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Response

Administration Menu

The Response option opens the Alarm Response Form that allows you to create a list of frequently used,

predefined responses to an alarm, and prevents the need of retyping an equivalent entry. The response

entries that you create will display on the Alarm Monitor Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

234

Restoring Secure Perfect Databases

Complete instructions for Restore functions are detailed in the Secure Perfect Installation Guide.

Restoring your databases depends on your system and how you performed your backups. The following

demonstrations are examples only.

Secure Perfect Enterprise Edition:

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Secure Perfect Professional or eZ Edition:

If you have a backup of Secure Perfect databases, the data can be restored using the SP Maintenance

Utility.

Click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo.

Resume Button

This icon will be active only if you clicked Pause. All badge transactions that occurred while the Pause

option was on will be displayed, once you select resume.

Clicking this icon from the Activity Monitor Form toolbar will access this option:

Return Date Filter Tab

Badge Report

Use this tab to generate a report based on the return date of the badges.

•

Do not filter badges by return date: Select this field if you do not want to use the expiration

date as a method of filtering the report information. This is equivalent to running a report on

badges for all return dates.

•

Filter badges using this return date range: Select this field if you do want to use the return

date as a method of filtering the report information. If this is selected, you must select a

starting and ending date.

•

Starting date: Click the start date you want for the starting range of badge return dates.

Ending date: Click the ending date you want for the ending range of badge return dates.

Roll Call

Reports Menu

The Roll Call option opens the Roll Call Report Form that allows you to create a report based on

parameters selected for people who last entered a facility by way of a specified reader.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

235

Routing Schedule Tab

Reference Topic:

Activity Monitor Form

Reader Form

Use this tab to select the schedules that will be used to determine when valid transactions will be sent to

the history file, monitor, and/or printer. Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end

time for different days of the week and modes. At the start of the schedule, the routing of the transactions

changes to the scheduled value. At the end of the schedule, the routing of the transactions returns to the

nonscheduled value. For example, if valid transactions are scheduled to route to history, the transactions

will stop being routed to history at the end of the schedule.

Valid transactions to history

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Yes/No: Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be saved to

the history file or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be

saved to the history file.

Valid transactions to monitor

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Yes/No: Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be

displayed on the Activity Monitor Form or No if the above schedule is when you do not want

valid transactions to be displayed on the Activity Monitor Form.

Valid transactions to printer

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

Yes/No: Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be sent to

the printer or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be sent

to the printer.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

236

Routing Tab

Reference Topic:

Parameters Form

Reader Form

Use this tab to define where transactions on the reader are sent. You have three options: badge history,

Activity Monitor, and a badge transaction printer. Badge transactions will print only if the transaction is

routed to the printer, the badge transaction printer is enabled, and a badge transaction printer is selected.

The enabling and selection of the badge transaction printer is done on the Parameters Form.

History

•

Valid: Enable this field if you want valid badge transactions recorded in badge history.

Invalid: Invalid badge transactions are always recorded in badge history. This default is a

read-only field and cannot be changed.

•

Lost: Lost badge transactions are always recorded in badge history. This default is a read-

only field and cannot be changed.

Monitor:

•

Valid: Enable this field if you want valid badge transactions to display on the Activity Monitor

Form.

•

Invalid: Enable this field if you want invalid badge transactions to display on the Activity

Monitor Form.

Lost: Enable this field if you want lost badge transactions to display on the Activity Monitor

Form.

Printer

•

Valid: Enable this field if you want valid badge transactions to be sent to the badge

transaction printer.

•

Invalid: Enable this field if you want invalid badge transactions to be sent to the badge

transaction printer.

Lost: Enable this field if you want lost badge transactions to be sent to the badge transaction

printer.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

237

Save Record

File Menu Item

The Save Record menu option saves changes made to the current record into the database. Unsaved

entries are discarded. The Save Record option is available only when a form is open, and you have been

given permission to update records.

Clicking this icon on the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Save Template As

File Menu

Select this option to create a new template and save under a new file name. This option is available only

when a Report Form is displaying.

Schedule Tab

Alarm Form

Use this tab to assign schedules for monitoring and printing alarms. Time schedules define intervals that

include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes. At the start of the schedule,

the alarm monitoring or printing changes to the scheduled value. At the end of the schedule, the alarm

monitoring or printing returns to the nonscheduled value. Example: If alarm monitoring is scheduled On,

it will return to 0ff (no monitoring) at the end of the assigned schedule.

Monitoring

•

Time schedule: Click the drop-down list to select a time schedule.

On/Off: Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor alarms or Off if the

above schedule is when you do not want to monitor alarms.

Print alarm

•

Time schedule: Click the drop-down list to select a time schedule.

Yes/No: Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms or No if the above

schedule is when you do not want to print alarms.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

238

Schedule Tab

Digital Input Form

This tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input Tab.

Use this tab to assign a schedule. Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time

for different days of the week and modes.

Time schedule

Click the drop-down list to select a previously created time schedule.

Enable/Disable

•

Select Enable if you want to enable this digital input when this time schedule starts. Enabling

the digital input allows it to then trigger the associated digital output when a state change

occurs.

•

Select Disable if you want to disable this digital input when this time schedule starts.

Disabling the digital input prevents the state change from being reported and the associated

digital output from triggering.

Schedule Tab

Digital Output Form

Use this tab to define schedules for turning digital outputs (DO) on or off. Time schedules define intervals

that include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes. At the start of the

schedule, the state of the DO changes to the scheduled value. At the end of the schedule, the state of

the DO returns to the nonscheduled value.

Example: If the DO is scheduled On, the DO will return to Off at the end of the schedule.

Turn DO On/Off

•

Time Schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list. This determines when the

DO will automatically turn on and off.

•

On/Off: Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital output to be in the

Active state or Off if the above schedule is when you do not want the digital output to be in

the Active state.

Schedule Tab

Digital Output Group Form

Use this tab to define schedules for turning all digital outputs in a selected digital output group on or off.

DO control

•

Time schedule: Select a time schedule from the drop-down list.

On/Off: Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital outputs in the selected

digital output group to be in the Active state. Select Off if the above schedule is when you do

not want the digital outputs in the selected digital output group to be in the Active state.

Schedules/Events

Reports Menu

The Schedules/Events option opens the Schedule Report Form that allows you to create a report on the

schedules and events defined in the Secure Perfect system.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

239

Search Menu

The Search option conducts a search in the database for all records that match the search criteria data

you enter in the form. The records found by the search are displayed in the search results window. Data

can be in any number of fields in the form or any number of tables.

Only records that match all fields in which data are entered are displayed. An asterisk (*) can be entered

in text boxes to indicate wildcard characters. The Search option is available only when a form that

contains records is open.

Example: Enter S*in an appropriate text box to display any records beginning with S. Example: A

search for badgeholders with the last name starting with Sm*would yield such names as Smithand

Smythers.

If no search data is entered, all records display. Any column displaying in the list box can be sorted by

clicking on the column heading.

Clicking this icon from the Secure Perfect toolbar can also access this option:

Search Menu Selections

The following selections display on the Search drop-down menu:

Clear Search

Recall Search

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

240

Secure Perfect Services

Reference Topic:

Log On/Log Off or Shut Down

Windows uses special programs called services. A service is a process that can start automatically when

the system boots and remains running as a background process independently of anyone being logged

in. It runs regardless of whether anyone is logged into Windows or SP. In other words, the computer must

be turned on but no one needs to be logged in. The SQL Server 2000 MUST be running for network

clients to connect and share the SQL database.

Secure Perfect has three services that run on all computers. Refer to your Secure Perfect Installation

Guide for additional information about services. The default Startup Type for services is set to Manual.

You are instructed to set the three services for an Automatic startup during the Secure Perfect installation

process, which means that they start as soon as the computer is started. Once set to Automatic, we

recommend that you do not change these settings.

1. Secure Perfect Diagnostics handles all diagnostics on all computers.

2. Secure Perfect Manager is the main service and handles micro communications and alarms.

3. Secure Perfect System Manager manages communication between computers and licensing.

Changing the state of services without a good working knowledge of the services purpose can cause

the computer to act erratically!

4. Secure Perfect API Service is used when using an API interface. This service is used when an

external system is sending or receiving transactions by way of Application Program Interface to

Secure Perfect. Do not start this service or change the settings unless you are using the API option in

Secure Perfect and have been previously licensed. This service can be started manually at the time

you install an API interface.

Services will automatically shut down when a client closes the Secure Perfect application and meets ALL

of the following criteria:

1. Does not host any micros or DVRs.

2. Does not have any API connections.

3. Is not a Thin Client.

4. Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own.

5. Is not a CCTV client.

6. Is not hosting a Guard Tour.

7. Client form Enable Auto Shutdown is selected.

The shutting down of a particular client computer designates that license capacity unused. Now, that

license is available for another computer that can now be designated a Secure Perfect client.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

241

Security Tab - Micro Form

Micro Form

Micro Passwords: The Micro Passwords list box has the following default password entries, enabling

four possible levels of security. Select a password; it now displays in the Password dialog box:

Select

one-1

Re-assign a password by typing over the

default displayed in the dialog box.

two-1

Re-assign a password by typing over the

default displayed in the dialog box.

three-1

four-1

Re-assign a password by typing over the

default displayed in the dialog box.

Re-assign a password by typing over the

default displayed in the dialog box.

Click Change to save and re-assign the new password.

If you change your micro passwords, you must enter the changed passwords in FlashTool by typing

over the existing entries. As you type the password in FlashTool, the characters will be replaced by

asterisks (*) to ensure the security of the host access system.

Communication Encryption

This feature allows you to configure additional security encryption that scrambles data into an

unbreakable code for public transmission. Encryption protects the Host-to-micro exchange of information.

The Host uses the Exchange Key to send the Data Key to the micro. Once the Data Key is received, the

Host-to-micro communication is encrypted using that key.

Enable Encryption: This check box is available only for head-of-line network, network+dialup, network +

direct, and network + network micros.

This checkbox, and all selections in the Communication Encryption grouping, are not available on

downstream micros.

Exchange Key: There are two options for encrypting an Exchange Key .

•

System: When you choose this selection, no additional selections are available or required.

This key is set at the factory.

•

Custom: When you select this option, the three dialog boxes become available. At the micro,

enter the 48-character exchange key using FlashTool. This exchange key must be identical

to the key that was entered into the micro parameter block at the micro.

If the Custom exchange key entries do not match, an alarm condition indication displays

in the Reference column of the Alarm Monitor Form.

•

Edit: Click to re-assign or revise an existing encrypted Custom exchange key for a selected

micro. It is possible to assign a duplicate exchange key on separate micros in your Secure

Perfect system. When you click this button one time, this button label changes to Auto

Generate.

Auto Generate: Click this button to system-generate a Custom exchange key. We

recommend that you record this number. You can now enter this key into the micro

parameter block at the micro.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

242

Data Key: Secure Perfect supports two methods of data encryption standards: DES and DESIII .

•

DES: When you select this method, only one dialog box is available for input. Enter 16

unique hex characters in this binary field. We recommend that you do not repeat any

character. The additional two dialog boxes are unavailable for entry.

DES III: Enter 48 unique hex characters in the binary dialog boxes, in three 16-character

stirngs.

•

If you do not enter unique hex characters, this micro record will not save. An invalid field

message will display, informing you that the keys that were chosen are too weak .

Edit: Click to re-assign or revise an existing encrypted data key for a selected micro. When

you click this button one time, this button label changes to Auto Generate.

Auto Generate: Click this button to system-generate a data key. We recommend that you

record this number.

•

Select Columns

This option allows you to select columns that you want to display on the Micro Utility Form by putting a

check next to the column name. When you click OK, the selected columns are saved so you will not have

to select again the next time the form is opened.

If you are licensed for Client Redundancy, the column Default Hostname is available for selection. If

not licensed for Client Redundancy, this selection is unavailable.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Select Criteria and Micro Selection

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

This dialog box allows you to enter search criteria for available micros, from facilities to which you have

access, that you want to add to your view or remove from the list of displayed micros, based on the

results of the search criteria. Complete one or more of the search criterion.

Micro Description: Enter a micro description for which to search. You may use wildcard characters as

part of the search criteria.

Micro Address: Enter a micro address.

Online, Offline, Error: Select micros that meet the search criteria and are online, offline, or in an error

state.

Hostname: Select a host name.

Comm Port: Select a Comm Port.

Available Micros The micros are displayed that meet the search criteria and are not already selected to

be displayed in the Micro Utility Form.

Selected Micros: This box displays the results of the search. The list of micros are those that meet the

search criteria and are selected to be displayed.

Search: Click to display the micros as requested by the parameters you selected.

Clear Search: Clears the micro search criteria and selection parameters from the form windowpanes,

allowing you to selected new criteria.

Select Default Alarms

Select Default Alarms Dialog Box

This dialog box displays all alarms currently assigned to this map. To designate this map as the default

for an alarm, select each alarm that should have this map as its default association, which means this

map will display whenever you select this alarm point from the Alarm Monitor Form and open the Alarm

Graphics Viewer Form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

243

Select Facilities

Operations Menu

The Select Facilities option opens the Set Active Facilities Form that allows you to change the facilities

currently in use.

Set As Default Template

File Menu

Use this option to select a template to use as the default template. This option is available only when a

Report Form is displaying with a loaded template. While the selected Report Form is displaying, select

Set As Default Template. A message displays stating the current template is now the default template

for this form. This template will automatically be loaded whenever you open this report form. You cannot

undo this election; however, you can later display and assign another report as the default.

Set Instruction Tab

Alarm Form

Use this tab to select the instructions you want to display on the Alarm Monitor Form when this alarm

occurs. Instructions are simply directions explaining how to react to the alarm.

Instruction

This windowpane displays the currently selected instructions in the order in which they will display on the

Alarm Monitor Form.

Move Up

Click to move a selected instruction up one line; it will display on the Alarm Monitor Form in the modified

order.

Move Down

Click to move a selected instruction down one line; it will display on the Alarm Monitor Form in the

modified order.

Edit

Click to display the Alarm Instruction Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign predefined

alarm instructions to this alarm.

Setting the Automatic Logoff Time

1. From the Administration menu, select Client.

2. In the Auto Logoff field, select a number between 1 and 99 to set the number of minutes of system

inactivity to elapse before an operator is automatically logged off. (Clicking the mouse button and

pressing keys on the keyboard is considered system activity; simply moving the mouse pointer is

not.)

3. To disable this feature, enter 0.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

244

Setting Up an Elevator

Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record. If you want to

change an existing record, delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking

method.

1. Decide which method of elevator control you want to use: no floor tracking , floor tracking by input , or

floor tracking by keypad .

2. Set up a micro (along with the reader board(s) and the digital output board(s); if using the floor tracking

by input method, then also set up a digital input board).

•

See information for setting up a direct-connect micro

See information for setting up a dial-up micro

3. Set the desired readers to active using the Reader Tab of the Reader Form.

•

See information for the Reader Tab, Reader Form.

4. Verify that the desired digital outputs are set up correctly. Also check the digital input setup if you are

using the floor tracking by input method.

5. Set up the floor descriptions using the Floor tab of the Floor Form.

6. Set up the elevator using the Elevator Form . Here you assign readers, digital outputs, and digital inputs

if using the floor tracking by input method.

Elevator control does not span micros. This means the reader, digital outputs, and digital inputs (if

applicable) MUST be on the same micro.

Settings Tab

Reference Topic:

Overview - Diagnostics

Diagnostic Setting Form

Enable debug messages: Select this box to enable monitoring for the selected diagnostic object.

Logfiles: Default and newly created LogFile names display in the Logfiles windowpane. Select a file

name from the list of files displayed, to which you are assigning this component for monitoring. By

assigning a component object to write to a particular logfile, you are removing that object from the list of

components that will write to the default logfile.

Save your new settings.

When you open the Diagnostic Viewer, the activities of your selected component will display in the logfile

to which it is assigned. (Those items with the COM # and Line # as part of the component name have the

highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage.)

After viewing, return to the Diagnostic Setting Form and disable the debug messages.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

245

Settings Tab

Parameters Form

Use this tab to set the general system settings.

Archive Database

Select an option to schedule archiving history. Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions,

leaving your history database empty. The default value for this option is Monthly. If you select:

•

Daily: The archive is appended every day beginning at 11:59:58 P.M.

Weekly: The archive is appended every week on the day that you select, beginning at 11:59:58

P.M. (You must select a day of the week.) Any change in the scheduling occurs immediately. For

example, if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is revised to archive on

Wednesday, the archiving will occur one day later, on Wednesday.

•

Monthly: The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11:59:58 P.M.

The Secure Perfect services do NOT have to be running. Archiving will occur as long as SQL Server

Agent services are running.

Database Connection

This feature allows you to configure the amount of time that elapes before your Secure Perfect system

detects and advises you that your database is not accessable.

•

Timeout (sec): The default is 30 seconds. The minimum is 3 seconds; the maximum is 120

seconds. 1) In a Secure Perfect Global Edition configuration, this is the amount of time until a

Regional failover begins. 2) In a typical Secure Perfect configuration, this is the amount of time

before Secure Perfect transactions are saved, Secure Perfect services shut down, and a

message advises you to repair your database.

•

Retry: The default is 3 retries. The minimum is ‘0’; the maximum is 5 retries.

Photo Aspect Ratio: Select or enter a number for the height and the width. The aspect ratio controls the

relationship between the height and width of the photos. This setting controls the photos displayed in the

Capture program, on the Person Form, and in the Badge Designer program.

Console alarm sound:

•

Continuous/Short: Select Continuous to sound a continuous tone when alarms are detected.

Select Short to sound a short tone when alarms are detected.

Enable global T&A: (Selected by default.) Select this check box if you want the entry status (either IN or

OUT) for all badges using Time and Attendance readers to be sent to and enforced by all micros.

Disabling the check box will require each micro to enforce T&A independently.

Enable global APB : (Selected by default.) Select this check box if you want the entry status (either IN or

OUT) for all badges using anti-passback readers to be sent to and enforced by all micros. Disabling the

check box will require each micro to enforce anti-passback on readers within each micro.

Enable unique & required Employee Number: (Selected and unavailable by default.) This checkbox is

only available after converting and upgrading a previous database. This feature enforces assignment of

unique and required Employee numbers for each Person record .

Grant Access on Duress: Select this check box to allow a door to open, and to signal a threatening

situation. With a valid access right and valid badge, a 1 + PIN code is entered at the reader. This

sequence generates a duress alarm that displays on the Alarm Monitor similar to the following: 0001-1-

01 Duress. The Activity Monitor displays activity type as Duress Activity. The default setting for

your system includes this feature already selected. Clear this checkbox if you do not want this feature.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

246

Alarm Notifier E-mail Support:

Enable: Select this check box to activate the e-mail notification option. The following e-mail dialog boxes

become available:

•

To E-mail Address Field: Select a field name from the drop-down list that will be assigned as an

e-mail address. 1) Labels for these field names are assigned on the User Fields and Address

Fields tab of this form. 2) The content of each field is entered in the User Fields or Address fields

on the Person Form.

[Global Edition: To ensure successful e-mail alarm notification across regions in a Global Edition

system, the Global Database Server and all Regional Database Servers must have identical

configuration settings. That is: 1) For all Servers in your Global Edition system, the user field

selected for the ‘To E-mail Address Field’ must be identical. While configuring each Server, select

the field that represents the e-mail address from the drop-down list. 2) All other Alarm Notification

information is specific to the Regional Database Server.]

•

SMTP E-mail Server: Enter the name of the server that handles the transfer of e-mail to and from

the e-mail addresses. This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up to 256 alphanumeric

characters.

From E-mail Address: Enter an e-mail address of the account or person that is generating this

alarm notification such as [email protected]. This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up

to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Allow Anonymous Access: This check box is selected by default, permitting the transmission of

an e-mail alarm notification without further authentication. The E-mail User Name and E-mail

Password dialog boxes are not available for entry and not required with default settings.

If the security requirements of the e-mail server require further authentication, clear the check box

to make available the dialog boxes for entry of an E-mail User Name and E-mail Password

E-mail User Name: Enter the user name that the e-mail server uses to validate this user. This

dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

E-mail Password: Enter the user password that the e-mail server uses to validate this user. This

dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Save before you exit this form.

Settings to Reach Host Tab

Micro Form

This tab will display ONLY when you are setting up a dial-up, head-of-line micro. Use this tab to

configure how the micro dials the host.

Phone Numbers to Reach Host

Enter telephone numbers of up to 20 digits, that the micro dials to reach the host. If an outside line must

be accessed in order to dial out, type a comma after the number that accesses the outside line, (typically

9). In this situation, if the telephone number to be dialed is 1-555-666-7777, you would enter the number

in this field as follows: 9,15556667777

The micro will dial the number in Number 1: and then try the others in numerical order until connection it

made.

All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits. If there is only one telephone

number for this micro to reach the host, repeat this number in all fields. (If you click Save after completing

the first Number field, the system will automatically complete all Number fields with a duplicate number.)

Dial Interval

Select the interval (none, 1 hour, 8 hours, 12 hours and 24 hours) at which the micro will automatically

dial the host. The micro will dial at the bottom of the hour. For example, if you select the 1 hour interval,

the micro would dial at 4:30, 5:30 and continue every hour after.

Same Number Retries

Enter the number of times (from 0 to 9) the micro should redial the same telephone number before

moving on to the next available telephone number.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

247

Retry Interval (30 sec)

Enter the number (from 1 to 9) of 30-second intervals that the micro will wait in between each dial to the

host. For example, if you specify 2, then the micro will wait: 2 x 30 = 60 seconds between each dial to the

host.

Settings to Reach Micro Tab

Micro Form

This tab will display ONLY when you are configuring a dial-up, head-of-line micro. Use this tab to

configure how the host dials the micro.

Phone Numbers to Reach Micro

Enter the telephone number of up to 20 digits, that the host dials to call the micro. If an outside line must

be accessed in order to dial out, type a comma after the number that accesses the outside line, (typically

9). In this situation, if the telephone number to be dialed is 1-555-666-7777, enter the number in this field

as follows: 9,15556667777

The micro will first dial the number in Number 1: and then try the number in Number 2:.

All telephone number fields must contain a telephone number. If there is only one telephone number

for the micro, enter this number in all fields.

Dial Interval

Select the interval (None, 1 hour, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours) at which the host will automatically dial the

micro. The host will dial one hour from the time the micro went into an idle (no activity) state. If this is a

new record, the count begins once the record is saved. If the Secure Perfect system is shut down, the

count begins once Secure Perfect is started.

Same Number Retries

Enter the number of times (from 0 to 9) the host should redial the same telephone number before moving

on to the next available telephone number.

Retry Interval (30 sec)

Enter the number (from 1 to 9) of 30-second intervals that the host will wait in between each dial to the

micro. For example, if you specify 2, then the host will wait: 2 x 30 = 60 seconds between each dial to the

host.

Host Call Back

Select this check box if you want the host computer to return a call back to the micro, providing additional

validation that the correct host-to-micro communication has taken place.

Show Me Demo Files

Reference Topic:

Index of Show Me Demo Files

If this graphic is displayed in a topic, click the Show me icon to view a step-by-step animated demo that

may assist you in performing the tasks described in the related fields. The demo files are in English only.

There is a short pause as the demo begins.

Sort Fields Dialog

This dialog box allows you to select fields by which to sort the information on a given report. The window

lists the fields available for the current report. If you want to sort by more than one field, hold the Control

key while you left-click the additional fields.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

248

Split

View Menu

The Split option allows you to increase or decrease the horizontal size of the tabs and windowpanes on a

form.

Status Bar

Reference Topic:

SP Taskbar

View Menu

Status Bar is a toggle option and determines whether or not you view the Secure Perfect status bar at

the bottom of your Secure Perfect screen. Clear the check box to hide the status bar from view. The

status bar displays the status of your Secure Perfect system, indicating the current operator,

communication port status, number of clients connected, number of alarms, and number of background

tasks.

The numbers indicate the total status of all active facilities assigned to the current operator.

Status Tab

Alarm Form

The Status tab provides the status of a selected alarm as stored in the micro’s database, such as its

sense time. This status reflects any changes made by schedules on this alarm and displays the date and

time of the last status.

•

Alarm group: Displays the alarm group to which the alarm is assigned.

Monitor: Displays whether this alarm is routed to the Alarm Monitor Form.

Last status date: Displays the date on which the status was last requested.

Last status time: Displays the time on which the status was last requested.

Refresh: Click Refresh to receive the most current status from the micro. This may take

several moments.

A status refresh on an offline micro will never be returned.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

249

Status Tab - Badge Form

A badge record must be selected in order to enable this tab. This windowpane provides an immediate

status of the selected badge according to the information in the micro database.

This is a diagnostic tool. The status displayed here is verification that a badge modification has

actually taken place in the database, according to a change in the Status as modified on the Badge

Definition tab.

Requirements are indicated by an asterisk.

Element

Micro*

Description

Select a micro from the drop-down list of available micros in facilities assigned to

this operator, and then click Status. The selected micro must be online in order

to display a Status windowpane conveying information about the selected badge.

Badge Status

APB Status

TA Status

Status*

Displays the current status according to the micro database.

Displays the current Anti-Passback status.

Displays the current Time and Attendance status.

Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request.

Status Tab

Digital Input Form

Select this tab to display information about the digital input as stored in the micro’s database, such as its

sense time. Request the latest information by clicking Refresh. It may take a moment to process

refreshing the data.

A status refresh on a micro that is offline will never be returned.

Sense Time:

The sense time as of the last status date and time.

Enabled:

Yes/No - Whether the digital input is enabled or disabled as of the last status date and time.

Last status date:

The date on which the status was last requested.

Last status time:

The time that status was last requested.

Refresh

Click to receive the current status information for this digital input.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

250

Status Tab

Digital Input Status Form

Provides the status of the selected digital input according to the information in the micro database. You

can list the digital inputs for all micros or list the digital inputs per micro.

Select micro

•

Select All to display the status for all digital inputs on all micros.

Select By micro to display the status for all digital inputs on a selected micro. Click the drop-down

arrow to display a list of active micros.

Refresh

Click Refresh to get an updated status on the digital inputs. A refresh for a dial-up micro will cause the

host to dial the micro unless they are already connected. The refresh process may take a few minutes. A

reader and associated DIs are grouped together, by reader number.

A refresh selected for a micro that is offline or in error will never be returned.

Column Headings:

Number

Displays the number of the digital input assigned by the system.

Description

Displays the description of the digital input. (A reader and associated DIs are grouped together, by reader

number.)

Micro

Displays the number of the micro to which this digital input belongs.

State

Displays the state of the digital input as On, Off or Trouble.

•

On means that the digital input point is in the Active state as defined on the Digital Input

Status Form.

•

Off means that the digital input point is Inactive as defined on the Digital Input Status Form

Trouble means that the digital input point has been cut or shorted.

Physical State

Displays the physical state of the digital input point.

•

Open means that the contact is open.

Closed means that the contact is closed.

Cut means that the line has been cut.

Short means that the line is shorted.

Date

Displays the date that the status was requested.

Time

Displays the time that the status was requested.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

251

Status Tab

Digital Output Status Form

This form displays the status of the selected digital outputs according to the information in the micro’s

database, by Reader DO or other DOs, by micro or for all micros.

Select DO Type

•

Select Reader to display the DO points available for the readers.

Select Other to display Aux DOs (the two DO relays available on a 2RP board) and other DO

points. Example DO points include lights, sirens, and door strikes that may be connected to

the micro.

Select Micro

•

Select All to display the status for the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select

DO type found on all micros.

•

Select By Micro to display the status for digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select

DO type found on a selected micro. Click the drop-down list to display active micros.

Refresh

Click to get an updated status on the digital outputs. A refresh for a dial-up micro will cause the host to

dial the micro unless they are already connected. The refresh process may take a few minutes.

A refresh selected for an offline micro or micro in error will never be returned.

Column Descriptions:

•

DO Number: Number of the digital output.

Description: Description of the door/DO in the database.

Micro: Number of the micro on which this digital output is found.

Current State: Displays the state of the digital output.

Date: Displays the date that the status was requested.

Time: Displays the time that the status was requested.

If this is a reader DO, the states are:

•

Lock: The door is locked.

Unlock: The door is unlocked.

If this is any other DO, the states are:

•

Active: The digital output is in the Active state defined on the Digital Output Form.

Inactive: The digital output is NOT in the Active state.

Status Tab

Digital Video Recorder Form

Perform a search, select a DVR from the right pane of this form window, and click Status. The DVR must

be online in order to display a Status pane conveying the following information about the selected DVR:

•

General Status: Current time, time powered on, MUX firmware, PPC firmware, and disk

capacity.

•

Camera Status: Current in alarms and current in video loss alarms.

Record Status: Record status, disk status, time recording, and time until disk is full.

Archiving Status: Archive status, device status, time archiving, and time until archive is full.

Ethernet Status: Normal connect IP address and connect priority, and live connect IP

address and connect priority.

ꢀ

A duplex recorder priority status displays on a line separate from the IP address.

A Triplex and/or Matrix recorder priority status displays as the last entry of the IP address

such as: 003.018.146.159/3

Click Status to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

252

Status Tab

Reference Topic:

Status Tab - Digital Input

Status Tab - Digital Output

Intrusion Zone Form

Perform a search, select an Intrusion Zone record from the right pane of this form window, and click

Status. This list box will display the status of all devices associated with this zone and status of the Zone.

•

Reader Status: Online/offline

Alarm Status: Monitored on/monitored off

Zone Status: Armed/Disarmed.

Digital Input: On/off/trouble

Digital Output Status: Active/inactive

Refresh: Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last status Refresh

request.

Status Tab - Micro Form

This tab allows you to quickly view the status of an individual micro.

The columns of the Micro Utility Form also reflect the status of the selected micro and explains what is

happening between the host and the micro.

Refresh: Click to update the data on this page. Depending on the size of your Secure Perfect system,

this may take some time. A status refresh can only be executed for on-line micros.

Encryption status for a head-of-line network + direct micro: If the micro loses network

connection and fails over to a direct connect, a configured Encryption status changes to None, since

Encryption is available for network micros only.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

253

Status Tab - Reader Form

Select this tab to view information about the reader as currently stored in the micro’s database, such as

its type and routing information. You can request the latest information by clicking Refresh. It may take a

moment to complete the refresh of the data.

Physical type: Displays the actual reader type: Normal, Badge and Keypad, and Badge or

Keypad.

Logical type: Displays the reader type this reader is being used as: Normal, APB In(anti-passback In),

APB Out(anti-passback Out), T&A In(time & attendance in), T&A Out(time & attendance out), In

Required, and Elevator.

Online status: Displays Onlineif the reader is currently online and Offlineif the reader is currently

offline.

Routing for valid transactions

•

History: Whether valid transactions are being routed to history.

Monitor: Whether valid transactions are being routed to the Activity Monitor Form.

Printer: Whether valid transactions are being routed to the printer.

Active Access Rights: Click to display a list of access rights that are currently active on the reader.

Last status date: Displays the date when the status was last requested.

Last status time: Displays the time when the status was last requested.

Refresh

Click to receive the current status information for this reader from the micro. A refresh for a dial-up micro

will cause the host to dial the micro unless they are already connected. The refresh process may take a

few minutes.

A status refresh requested for a micro that is offline or in error will never be returned.

Supervised DI Points on 2SRP Board Not Working

Check the board addresses on the reader boards in your micro. They must be consecutively numbered.

This means that the first reader board must be set to Address 1, the second reader board must be set to

Address 2 and so on.

Swipe and Show Button

Clicking this icon from the Activity Monitor Form toolbar will access the Swipe and Show program:

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

254

Swipe and Show Option

Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time. If readers

have not been selected, the program will not start. If Imaging is not licensed for the system, this option is

not available.

The Swipe and Show program is a monitoring and validation option, available on the Activity Monitor

Form. When properly configured and following a badge transaction, the operator is able to observe a

badge photo and text description of the transaction in the Swipe and Show window. An operator is able to

monitor transactions and compare the photo ID to a live image.

The Swipe and Show window is set to a default size, cannot be resized, and displays the following:

Element

Photo

Description

A photo displays in this windowpane for the badge presented to the reader. If

no photo is available or an unknown badge is presented to the reader, a

silhouette displays.

Name

First name, middle initial, and last name of badge holder.

Number assigned to this employee.

Employee Number

Department

Department where person is assigned.

Transaction Type

Valid (displays green), invalid (displays red), or unknown (displays gray)

messages display. Guard Tour activity types also display. See Activity

Monitoring Using the Activity Monitor Form for a listing of activity types.

Date/Time

Reader transaction date and time.

Reader Description

Always on Top

Description of reader where badge was presented.

Right-click the Swipe and Show title bar to display a shortcut option that

keeps the window in the forefront of all windows displaying on the Secure

Perfect workstation.

If you select another transaction, the window content changes to the available information for that

transaction. Close this window by selecting the window exit button, closing the Activity Monitor Form, or

closing the Secure Perfect client program.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

255

Takeover and Recovery Timing

Reference Topics:

Client Tab

Backup Clients Tab

Client device takeover occurs following communication breakdown between the default client and the

backup client, under the following circumstances:

1. If network problems should occur.

2. If a default client computer crashes.

3. Immediate takeover following normal shutdown, ignoring any other settings. This occurs if Secure

Perfect services are stopped and Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown is enabled on the Backup

Clients tab of the Client form.

When a backup client detects that the default client is offline, an approximate takeover timing can be

predicted using the following formula:

Ping Interval X Retry Count of Default Computer

+ Heartbeat Interval X Heartbeat Retry Count of Default Computer

+ Network Delays

All these values are configured on the Client form.

The values in this formula can be adjusted to achieve a shorter or longer takeover scenario.

Template - Defined

Reference Topics:

Save Template As

Set As Default Template

Create Default Template

Delete Template

The Template drop-down list on the Report forms displays the name of the currently loaded template, if

there is one. To load, select from the drop-down list of the available templates and load the details to the

form. Report templates are useful when you run a certain report frequently. After you select a report, it

can be saved as a template and revised by loading it from the template combo box.

Tile

Window Menu

This option allows you to control multiple window or forms. If you have several forms open but not visible,

select this option to view all forms at one time tiled side-by-side or one over the other on your display

monitor.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

256

Time and Attendance

Set the time and attendance status to neutral for all badges in this micro.

Clicking this icon from the Micro Utility Form toolbar will access this option:

Time and Attendance History

Reports Menu

The Time and Attendance History option opens the Time and Attendance History Report Form that

allows you to create a report based on the history of time and attendance activity and the parameters you

select.

Time Schedule

Administration Menu

The Time Schedule option opens the Time Schedule Form that allows you to define when an action will

begin and conclude on a daily or weekly basis. The schedules created here can be used many times in

controlling how the system works.

Time Schedules Tab

Time Schedule Form

The display time is in half-hour increments by default. To change the display increment, click and hold on

the right end of the bottom time bar, then move the cursor to the left until you are at the time increment

that you want. Then, click the desired time.

The time 00:00 is the same as 24:00 of the same day. For example, Saturday at 00:00 on the left side

of the chart is the same as 00:00 on the right side of the chart .

Use this tab to create a time schedule.

•

Time chart: Click the desired start time and day of the week/mode and drag to the desired

stop time and day of the week/mode. This creates a bar that indicates that the time schedule

will occur during that time frame. Note that the current time schedule’s bar is selected.

Continue for each appropriate day that completes you new time schedule.

Interval: Displays the number of the time schedule.

New: Click to create a new time schedule.

Delete: Click this button to delete a time schedule. You may delete a schedule that is

currently in effect. Refer to the note below.

•

Deleting a schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is

associated. Any devices currently under the effect of the deleted schedule will remain in that state until

changed manually or by another schedule.

•

Interval details: The controls in this section are not needed in most circumstances. Use

details to verify that your selections match the calendar display.

Start time: Displays the time on which the time schedule will begin.

Stop time: Displays the time on which the time schedule will end.

Mode/day: Displays the mode or day on which the time schedule will occur.

You will need to assign this time schedule to a device such as a reader. Note the example below.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

257

Example:

1. On the Reader Form, select Building 1 Lobby Door reader record.

2. On the Functions Schedule tab, select a Door schedule BocaHQ Normal Workweekfrom the

drop-down list.

3. Select Unlock.

4. The result is that the reader will unlock the door based on the time schedule of BocaHQ Normal

Workweek.

Time Zone Tab

Micro Form

Select the time zone of this micro from the drop-down list of available time zones. The global map

graphics reflects the areas within that time zone. You can also use your mouse click-and-drag feature to

select and edit the time zone.

Toolbar

View Menu

The Toolbar option determines whether or not you view and access the Secure Perfect toolbar icons.

Clear the check box to hide the Toolbar from view.

Tour Point

Administration Menu

The Tour Point option opens the Tour Point Form that allows you to select a reader or digital input,

associated with pre-determined security inspection points by someone such as a security guard.

This option is unavailable if you are not licensed for Guard Tour.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

258

Tour Point Tab

Tour Point Form

A tour point can be a reader or digital input. You must select one option before you can save this point

record.

Element

Description

Reader

If you selected Reader, this field is available. Select a

reader from the drop-down list of available readers.

When reader records are created, we recommend

that you keep the mmmm-b-pp prefixand add text to

the description field. A complete and accurate reader

description aids in assigning the reader points from this

drop-down list.

Digital Input

If you selected Digital Input, this field is available. Select a

digital input from the drop-down list of available digital

inputs.

When the digital input records are created, we

recommend that you keep the mmmm-b-ppprefix and add

text in the description field. A complete and accurate

digital input description aids in assigning alarm points

from this drop-down list.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

259

UL Certification

Secure Perfect is a UL-listed Grade A system (UL 1076 Grade A Proprietary Burglary Requirements/UL

294 Access Control Requirements). Your installation must adhere to the requirements listed in the

Certification section of the Secure Perfect Installation Manual, in order to qualify as UL-listed Grade A

certified.

User Fields Tab - Badge Form

Use this tab to enter user-defined information for the Badge Form record selected in the right

windowpane.

Modify Field

To give value to one of the fields, select a Label in the User Fields windowpane. Enter the value that you

want to display, corresponding to this label. This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric characters.

User Fields

The existing list of labels and their values is listed in the User Fields windowpane. The selected label in

the User Fields windowpane is the label to which you are assigning a value.

Example:

The Badge User Field 1 was previously defined and labeled on the Parameters Form as Condition of

Badge. The first label listed here, in the User Fields windowpane, displays as Condition of Badge. Select

Condition of Badge. In the Modify Field dialog box, enter the corresponding condition of this badge as

Reported Lost by Badgeholder.

User Fields Tab

Parameters Form

Complete this tab to modify the labels for user fields. These labels are used on the Person Form and

Badge Form.

Person User Fields

Person User Fields Labels: Displays a list of 90 currently assigned labels for the Person Form user

fields.

New label: To assign or edit the label of a Person Form user field, select a label and enter the new or

edited text in this dialog box. The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

Badge User Fields

Badge User Fields Labels: Displays a list of 20 currently assigned labels for the Badge Form user fields.

New label: To assign or edit the label of a Badge Form user field, select a label and enter the new or

edited text in this dialog box. The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

Save before you exit this form.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

260

User Fields Tab

Person Form

Use this tab to enter user-defined information.

Modify Field

Enter the value for the currently selected User Field. This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric

characters. User Fields are not appropriate for exceptionally lengthy street addresses or E-mail

addresses.

User Fields

The current user field Label and Value is listed in this windowpane. To give values to these fields, select

a Label.

Example:

The label for User Field 1 was previously defined on the Parameters Form as Social Security Number.

The first label listed in this windowpane displays as Social Security Number. Enter the corresponding

Social Security for this person record in the Modify Field text box.

Secure Perfect 6.1.1 User Manual

261

Video Display Tab

Reference Topic: